OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/open8_urisc/open8_urisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories open8_urisc

[/] [open8_urisc/] [trunk/] [gnu/] [binutils/] [gas/] [doc/] [as.texinfo] - Blame information for rev 147

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 147 khays
\input texinfo @c                               -*-Texinfo-*-
2
@c  Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
3
@c  2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
4
@c  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5
@c UPDATE!!  On future updates--
6
@c   (1)   check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
7
@c         md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
8
@c   (2)   for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
9
@c         in config/tc-*.c
10
@c   (3)   for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
11
@c         in config/obj-*.c
12
@c   (4)   portable directives in potable[] in read.c
13
@c %**start of header
14
@setfilename as.info
15
@c ---config---
16
@macro gcctabopt{body}
17
@code{\body\}
18
@end macro
19
@c defaults, config file may override:
20
@set have-stabs
21
@c ---
22
@c man begin NAME
23
@c ---
24
@include asconfig.texi
25
@include bfdver.texi
26
@c ---
27
@c man end
28
@c ---
29
@c common OR combinations of conditions
30
@ifset COFF
31
@set COFF-ELF
32
@end ifset
33
@ifset ELF
34
@set COFF-ELF
35
@end ifset
36
@ifset AOUT
37
@set aout-bout
38
@end ifset
39
@ifset ARM/Thumb
40
@set ARM
41
@end ifset
42
@ifset Blackfin
43
@set Blackfin
44
@end ifset
45
@ifset BOUT
46
@set aout-bout
47
@end ifset
48
@ifset H8/300
49
@set H8
50
@end ifset
51
@ifset SH
52
@set H8
53
@end ifset
54
@ifset HPPA
55
@set abnormal-separator
56
@end ifset
57
@c ------------
58
@ifset GENERIC
59
@settitle Using @value{AS}
60
@end ifset
61
@ifclear GENERIC
62
@settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
63
@end ifclear
64
@setchapternewpage odd
65
@c %**end of header
66
 
67
@c @smallbook
68
@c @set SMALL
69
@c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
70
@c instructions.  Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
71
@c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
72
@c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
73
@c
74
@c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
75
@c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
76
@c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
77
@c break.
78
@c
79
@c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
80
@c not well for the default large-page format.  This manual expects that if you
81
@c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
82
@c tables in question.  You can turn on one without the other at your
83
@c discretion, of course.
84
@ifinfo
85
@set SMALL
86
@c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
87
@c might as well show 'em anyways.
88
@end ifinfo
89
 
90
@ifnottex
91
@dircategory Software development
92
@direntry
93
* As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
94
* Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
95
@end direntry
96
@end ifnottex
97
 
98
@finalout
99
@syncodeindex ky cp
100
 
101
@copying
102
This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
103
 
104
@c man begin COPYRIGHT
105
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
106
2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
107
Inc.
108
 
109
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
110
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
111
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
112
with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
113
Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
114
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
115
 
116
@c man end
117
@end copying
118
 
119
@titlepage
120
@title Using @value{AS}
121
@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
122
@ifclear GENERIC
123
@subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
124
@end ifclear
125
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
126
@sp 1
127
@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
128
@end ifset
129
@sp 1
130
@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
131
@sp 1
132
@sp 13
133
The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
134
Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
135
first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
136
The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
137
distracting the boss while they got some work
138
done.
139
@sp 3
140
@author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
141
@page
142
@tex
143
{\parskip=0pt
144
\hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
145
\hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
146
}
147
%"boxit" macro for figures:
148
%Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
149
\gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
150
     \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
151
#2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
152
\gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
153
@end tex
154
 
155
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
156
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
157
2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
158
Inc.
159
 
160
      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
161
      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
162
      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
163
      with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
164
      Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
165
      section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
166
 
167
@end titlepage
168
@contents
169
 
170
@ifnottex
171
@node Top
172
@top Using @value{AS}
173
 
174
This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
175
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
176
@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
177
@end ifset
178
version @value{VERSION}.
179
@ifclear GENERIC
180
This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
181
code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
182
@end ifclear
183
 
184
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
185
Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
186
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
187
 
188
@menu
189
* Overview::                    Overview
190
* Invoking::                    Command-Line Options
191
* Syntax::                      Syntax
192
* Sections::                    Sections and Relocation
193
* Symbols::                     Symbols
194
* Expressions::                 Expressions
195
* Pseudo Ops::                  Assembler Directives
196
@ifset ELF
197
* Object Attributes::           Object Attributes
198
@end ifset
199
* Machine Dependencies::        Machine Dependent Features
200
* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
201
* Acknowledgements::            Who Did What
202
* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
203
* AS Index::                    AS Index
204
@end menu
205
@end ifnottex
206
 
207
@node Overview
208
@chapter Overview
209
@iftex
210
This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
211
@ifclear GENERIC
212
This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
213
code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
214
@end ifclear
215
@end iftex
216
 
217
@cindex invocation summary
218
@cindex option summary
219
@cindex summary of options
220
Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.  For details,
221
see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
222
 
223
@c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
224
 
225
@ignore
226
@c man begin SEEALSO
227
gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
228
@c man end
229
@end ignore
230
 
231
@c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
232
@c to be limited to one line for the header.
233
@smallexample
234
@c man begin SYNOPSIS
235
@value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
236
 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}]  [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
237
 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
238
 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
239
 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
240
 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
241
 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
242
 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
243
 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
244
 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
245
 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
246
 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
247
 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248
 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249
@c
250
@c Target dependent options are listed below.  Keep the list sorted.
251
@c Add an empty line for separation.
252
@ifset ALPHA
253
 
254
@emph{Target Alpha options:}
255
   [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
256
   [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
257
   [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
258
   [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
259
   [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
260
@end ifset
261
@ifset ARC
262
 
263
@emph{Target ARC options:}
264
   [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
265
   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
266
@end ifset
267
@ifset ARM
268
 
269
@emph{Target ARM options:}
270
@c Don't document the deprecated options
271
   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
272
   [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273
   [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
274
   [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
275
   [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
276
   [@b{-mthumb}]
277
   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278
   [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
279
    @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
280
   [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
281
@end ifset
282
@ifset Blackfin
283
 
284
@emph{Target Blackfin options:}
285
   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
286
   [@b{-mfdpic}]
287
   [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
288
   [@b{-mnopic}]
289
@end ifset
290
@ifset CRIS
291
 
292
@emph{Target CRIS options:}
293
   [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
294
   [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
295
   [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
296
   [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
297
@c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
298
@c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
299
@end ifset
300
@ifset D10V
301
 
302
@emph{Target D10V options:}
303
   [@b{-O}]
304
@end ifset
305
@ifset D30V
306
 
307
@emph{Target D30V options:}
308
   [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
309
@end ifset
310
@ifset H8
311
 
312
@emph{Target H8/300 options:}
313
   [-h-tick-hex]
314
@end ifset
315
@ifset HPPA
316
@c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
317
@end ifset
318
@ifset I80386
319
 
320
@emph{Target i386 options:}
321
   [@b{--32}|@b{--n32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
322
   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
323
@end ifset
324
@ifset I960
325
 
326
@emph{Target i960 options:}
327
@c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
328
   [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
329
    @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
330
   [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
331
@end ifset
332
@ifset IA64
333
 
334
@emph{Target IA-64 options:}
335
   [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
336
   [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
337
   [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
338
   [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
339
   [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
340
   [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
341
   [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
342
@end ifset
343
@ifset IP2K
344
 
345
@emph{Target IP2K options:}
346
   [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
347
@end ifset
348
@ifset M32C
349
 
350
@emph{Target M32C options:}
351
   [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
352
@end ifset
353
@ifset M32R
354
 
355
@emph{Target M32R options:}
356
   [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
357
   @b{--W[n]p}]
358
@end ifset
359
@ifset M680X0
360
 
361
@emph{Target M680X0 options:}
362
   [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
363
@end ifset
364
@ifset M68HC11
365
 
366
@emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
367
   [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}]
368
   [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
369
   [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
370
   [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
371
   [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
372
   [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
373
@end ifset
374
@ifset MCORE
375
 
376
@emph{Target MCORE options:}
377
   [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
378
   [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
379
@end ifset
380
@ifset MICROBLAZE
381
@emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
382
@c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
383
@end ifset
384
@ifset MIPS
385
 
386
@emph{Target MIPS options:}
387
   [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
388
   [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
389
   [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
390
   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
391
   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
392
   [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
393
   [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
394
   [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
395
   [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
396
   [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
397
   [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
398
   [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
399
   [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
400
   [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
401
   [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
402
   [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
403
   [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
404
   [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
405
   [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
406
   [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
407
   [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
408
@end ifset
409
@ifset MMIX
410
 
411
@emph{Target MMIX options:}
412
   [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
413
   [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
414
   [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
415
   [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
416
@end ifset
417
@ifset PDP11
418
 
419
@emph{Target PDP11 options:}
420
   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
421
   [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
422
   [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
423
@end ifset
424
@ifset PJ
425
 
426
@emph{Target picoJava options:}
427
   [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
428
@end ifset
429
@ifset PPC
430
 
431
@emph{Target PowerPC options:}
432
   [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
433
   [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
434
    @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
435
    @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}|
436
    @b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
437
    @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpw7}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
438
   [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}]
439
   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
440
   [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
441
   [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
442
   [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
443
   [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
444
@end ifset
445
@ifset RX
446
 
447
@emph{Target RX options:}
448
   [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
449
   [@b{-m32bit-ints}|@b{-m16bit-ints}]
450
   [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
451
@end ifset
452
@ifset S390
453
 
454
@emph{Target s390 options:}
455
   [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
456
   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
457
   [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
458
@end ifset
459
@ifset SCORE
460
 
461
@emph{Target SCORE options:}
462
   [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
463
   [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
464
   [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
465
   [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
466
@end ifset
467
@ifset SPARC
468
 
469
@emph{Target SPARC options:}
470
@c The order here is important.  See c-sparc.texi.
471
   [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
472
    @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
473
   [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
474
   [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
475
@end ifset
476
@ifset TIC54X
477
 
478
@emph{Target TIC54X options:}
479
 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
480
 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
481
@end ifset
482
 
483
@ifset TIC6X
484
 
485
@emph{Target TIC6X options:}
486
   [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
487
   [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
488
   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
489
@end ifset
490
 
491
@ifset XTENSA
492
 
493
@emph{Target Xtensa options:}
494
 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
495
 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
496
 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
497
 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
498
@end ifset
499
 
500
@ifset Z80
501
 
502
@emph{Target Z80 options:}
503
  [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
504
  [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
505
  [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
506
  [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
507
  [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
508
  [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
509
  [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
510
@end ifset
511
 
512
@ifset Z8000
513
@c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
514
@end ifset
515
 
516
@c man end
517
@end smallexample
518
 
519
@c man begin OPTIONS
520
 
521
@table @gcctabopt
522
@include at-file.texi
523
 
524
@item -a[cdghlmns]
525
Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
526
 
527
@table @gcctabopt
528
@item -ac
529
omit false conditionals
530
 
531
@item -ad
532
omit debugging directives
533
 
534
@item -ag
535
include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
536
 
537
@item -ah
538
include high-level source
539
 
540
@item -al
541
include assembly
542
 
543
@item -am
544
include macro expansions
545
 
546
@item -an
547
omit forms processing
548
 
549
@item -as
550
include symbols
551
 
552
@item =file
553
set the name of the listing file
554
@end table
555
 
556
You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
557
listing without forms processing.  The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
558
the last one.  By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
559
 
560
@item --alternate
561
Begin in alternate macro mode.
562
@ifclear man
563
@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
564
@end ifclear
565
 
566
@item --compress-debug-sections
567
Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib.  The debug sections are renamed
568
to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
569
compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
570
 
571
@item --nocompress-debug-sections
572
Do not compress DWARF debug sections.  This is the default.
573
 
574
@item -D
575
Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
576
other assemblers.
577
 
578
@item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
579
When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
580
information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
581
 
582
@item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
583
Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
584
@var{value} must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
585
indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
586
value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
587
use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
588
 
589
@item -f
590
``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
591
compiler output).
592
 
593
@item -g
594
@itemx --gen-debug
595
Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
596
debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently means either STABS,
597
ECOFF or DWARF2.
598
 
599
@item --gstabs
600
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
601
may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
602
 
603
@item --gstabs+
604
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
605
extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
606
debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
607
may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU extension is
608
the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
609
 
610
@item --gdwarf-2
611
Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.  This
612
may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.  Note---this
613
option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
614
 
615
@item --size-check=error
616
@itemx --size-check=warning
617
Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
618
 
619
@item --help
620
Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
621
 
622
@item --target-help
623
Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
624
 
625
@item -I @var{dir}
626
Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
627
 
628
@item -J
629
Don't warn about signed overflow.
630
 
631
@item -K
632
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
633
This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
634
@end ifclear
635
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
636
Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
637
@end ifset
638
 
639
@item -L
640
@itemx --keep-locals
641
Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
642
system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
643
or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
644
@ifclear man
645
@xref{Symbol Names}.
646
@end ifclear
647
 
648
@item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
649
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
650
listing to @var{number}.
651
 
652
@item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
653
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
654
lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
655
 
656
@item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
657
Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
658
@var{number} bytes.
659
 
660
@item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
661
Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
662
to @var{number} + 1.
663
 
664
@item -o @var{objfile}
665
Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
666
 
667
@item -R
668
Fold the data section into the text section.
669
 
670
@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
671
Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
672
@var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
673
assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
674
memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
675
requirements at the expense of speed.
676
 
677
@item --reduce-memory-overheads
678
This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
679
assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a synonym for
680
@samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
681
 
682
@item --statistics
683
Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
684
assembly.
685
 
686
@item --strip-local-absolute
687
Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
688
 
689
@item -v
690
@itemx -version
691
Print the @command{as} version.
692
 
693
@item --version
694
Print the @command{as} version and exit.
695
 
696
@item -W
697
@itemx --no-warn
698
Suppress warning messages.
699
 
700
@item --fatal-warnings
701
Treat warnings as errors.
702
 
703
@item --warn
704
Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
705
 
706
@item -w
707
Ignored.
708
 
709
@item -x
710
Ignored.
711
 
712
@item -Z
713
Generate an object file even after errors.
714
 
715
@item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
716
Standard input, or source files to assemble.
717
 
718
@end table
719
@c man end
720
 
721
@ifset ALPHA
722
 
723
@ifclear man
724
@xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
725
for an Alpha processor.
726
@end ifclear
727
 
728
@ifset man
729
@c man begin OPTIONS
730
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
731
processor.
732
@c man end
733
@c man begin INCLUDE
734
@include c-alpha.texi
735
@c ended inside the included file
736
@end ifset
737
 
738
@end ifset
739
 
740
@c man begin OPTIONS
741
@ifset ARC
742
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
743
an ARC processor.
744
 
745
@table @gcctabopt
746
@item -marc[5|6|7|8]
747
This option selects the core processor variant.
748
@item -EB | -EL
749
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
750
@end table
751
@end ifset
752
 
753
@ifset ARM
754
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
755
processor family.
756
 
757
@table @gcctabopt
758
@item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
759
Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
760
@item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
761
Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
762
@item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
763
Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
764
@item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
765
Select which floating point ABI is in use.
766
@item -mthumb
767
Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
768
@item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
769
Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
770
@item -EB | -EL
771
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
772
@item -mthumb-interwork
773
Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
774
ARM code in mind.
775
@item -k
776
Specify that PIC code has been generated.
777
@end table
778
@end ifset
779
@c man end
780
 
781
@ifset Blackfin
782
 
783
@ifclear man
784
@xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
785
configured for the Blackfin processor family.
786
@end ifclear
787
 
788
@ifset man
789
@c man begin OPTIONS
790
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
791
the Blackfin processor family.
792
@c man end
793
@c man begin INCLUDE
794
@include c-bfin.texi
795
@c ended inside the included file
796
@end ifset
797
 
798
@end ifset
799
 
800
@c man begin OPTIONS
801
@ifset CRIS
802
See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
803
@end ifset
804
 
805
@ifset D10V
806
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
807
a D10V processor.
808
@table @gcctabopt
809
@cindex D10V optimization
810
@cindex optimization, D10V
811
@item -O
812
Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
813
@end table
814
@end ifset
815
 
816
@ifset D30V
817
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
818
processor.
819
@table @gcctabopt
820
@cindex D30V optimization
821
@cindex optimization, D30V
822
@item -O
823
Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
824
 
825
@cindex D30V nops
826
@item -n
827
Warn when nops are generated.
828
 
829
@cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
830
@item -N
831
Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
832
@end table
833
@end ifset
834
@c man end
835
 
836
@ifset I80386
837
 
838
@ifclear man
839
@xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
840
configured for an i386 processor.
841
@end ifclear
842
 
843
@ifset man
844
@c man begin OPTIONS
845
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
846
an i386 processor.
847
@c man end
848
@c man begin INCLUDE
849
@include c-i386.texi
850
@c ended inside the included file
851
@end ifset
852
 
853
@end ifset
854
 
855
@c man begin OPTIONS
856
@ifset I960
857
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
858
Intel 80960 processor.
859
 
860
@table @gcctabopt
861
@item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
862
Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
863
 
864
@item -b
865
Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
866
 
867
@item -no-relax
868
Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
869
error if necessary.
870
 
871
@end table
872
@end ifset
873
 
874
@ifset IP2K
875
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
876
Ubicom IP2K series.
877
 
878
@table @gcctabopt
879
 
880
@item -mip2022ext
881
Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
882
 
883
@item -mip2022
884
Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
885
just the basic IP2022 ones.
886
 
887
@end table
888
@end ifset
889
 
890
@ifset M32C
891
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
892
Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
893
 
894
@table @gcctabopt
895
 
896
@item -m32c
897
Assemble M32C instructions.
898
 
899
@item -m16c
900
Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
901
 
902
@item -relax
903
Enable support for link-time relaxations.
904
 
905
@item -h-tick-hex
906
Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
907
 
908
@end table
909
@end ifset
910
 
911
@ifset M32R
912
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
913
Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
914
 
915
@table @gcctabopt
916
 
917
@item --m32rx
918
Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target.  The default
919
is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
920
 
921
@item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
922
Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
923
encountered.
924
 
925
@item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
926
Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
927
encountered.
928
 
929
@end table
930
@end ifset
931
 
932
@ifset M680X0
933
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
934
Motorola 68000 series.
935
 
936
@table @gcctabopt
937
 
938
@item -l
939
Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
940
 
941
@item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
942
@itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
943
@itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
944
Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target.  The default
945
is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
946
 
947
@item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
948
The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
949
The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32.  Although
950
the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
951
two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
952
coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
953
 
954
@item -m68851 | -mno-68851
955
The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
956
unit coprocessor.  The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
957
 
958
@end table
959
@end ifset
960
 
961
@ifset PDP11
962
 
963
For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
964
see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
965
 
966
@table @gcctabopt
967
@item -mpic | -mno-pic
968
Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code.  The
969
default is @option{-mpic}.
970
 
971
@item -mall
972
@itemx -mall-extensions
973
Enable all instruction set extensions.  This is the default.
974
 
975
@item -mno-extensions
976
Disable all instruction set extensions.
977
 
978
@item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
979
Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
980
 
981
@item -m@var{cpu}
982
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
983
disable all other extensions.
984
 
985
@item -m@var{machine}
986
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
987
model, and disable all other extensions.
988
@end table
989
 
990
@end ifset
991
 
992
@ifset PJ
993
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
994
a picoJava processor.
995
 
996
@table @gcctabopt
997
 
998
@cindex PJ endianness
999
@cindex endianness, PJ
1000
@cindex big endian output, PJ
1001
@item -mb
1002
Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1003
 
1004
@cindex little endian output, PJ
1005
@item -ml
1006
Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1007
 
1008
@end table
1009
@end ifset
1010
 
1011
@ifset M68HC11
1012
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1013
Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1014
 
1015
@table @gcctabopt
1016
 
1017
@item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12
1018
Specify what processor is the target.  The default is
1019
defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1020
 
1021
@item -mshort
1022
Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1023
 
1024
@item -mlong
1025
Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1026
 
1027
@item -mshort-double
1028
Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1029
 
1030
@item -mlong-double
1031
Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1032
 
1033
@item --force-long-branches
1034
Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1035
conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1036
sub routine.
1037
 
1038
@item -S | --short-branches
1039
Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1040
when the offset is out of range.
1041
 
1042
@item --strict-direct-mode
1043
Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1044
when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1045
 
1046
@item --print-insn-syntax
1047
Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1048
 
1049
@item --print-opcodes
1050
print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1051
 
1052
@item --generate-example
1053
print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1054
This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1055
 
1056
@end table
1057
@end ifset
1058
 
1059
@ifset SPARC
1060
The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1061
for the SPARC architecture:
1062
 
1063
@table @gcctabopt
1064
@item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1065
@itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1066
Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1067
 
1068
@samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1069
@samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1070
 
1071
@samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1072
UltraSPARC extensions.
1073
 
1074
@item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1075
For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
1076
equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1077
 
1078
@item -bump
1079
Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1080
@end table
1081
@end ifset
1082
 
1083
@ifset TIC54X
1084
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1085
architecture.
1086
 
1087
@table @gcctabopt
1088
@item -mfar-mode
1089
Enable extended addressing mode.  All addresses and relocations will assume
1090
extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1091
@item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1092
Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1093
@item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1094
Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1095
behaviour in the shell.
1096
@end table
1097
@end ifset
1098
 
1099
@ifset MIPS
1100
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1101
a @sc{mips} processor.
1102
 
1103
@table @gcctabopt
1104
@item -G @var{num}
1105
This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1106
implicitly with the @code{gp} register.  It is only accepted for targets that
1107
use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
1108
 
1109
@cindex MIPS endianness
1110
@cindex endianness, MIPS
1111
@cindex big endian output, MIPS
1112
@item -EB
1113
Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1114
 
1115
@cindex little endian output, MIPS
1116
@item -EL
1117
Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1118
 
1119
@cindex MIPS ISA
1120
@item -mips1
1121
@itemx -mips2
1122
@itemx -mips3
1123
@itemx -mips4
1124
@itemx -mips5
1125
@itemx -mips32
1126
@itemx -mips32r2
1127
@itemx -mips64
1128
@itemx -mips64r2
1129
Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} Instruction Set Architecture level.
1130
@samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1131
alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1132
@samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1133
@samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1134
@samp{-mips64r2}
1135
correspond to generic
1136
@samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1137
and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1138
ISA processors, respectively.
1139
 
1140
@item -march=@var{CPU}
1141
Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1142
 
1143
@item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1144
Schedule and tune for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1145
 
1146
@item -mfix7000
1147
@itemx -mno-fix7000
1148
Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1149
of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1150
 
1151
@item -mdebug
1152
@itemx -no-mdebug
1153
Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1154
section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1155
 
1156
@item -mpdr
1157
@itemx -mno-pdr
1158
Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1159
 
1160
@item -mgp32
1161
@itemx -mfp32
1162
The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1163
flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1164
all times.  @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1165
and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1166
 
1167
@item -mips16
1168
@itemx -no-mips16
1169
Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to putting
1170
@code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-no-mips16}
1171
turns off this option.
1172
 
1173
@item -msmartmips
1174
@itemx -mno-smartmips
1175
Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1176
equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1177
@samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1178
 
1179
@item -mips3d
1180
@itemx -no-mips3d
1181
Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1182
This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1183
@samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1184
 
1185
@item -mdmx
1186
@itemx -no-mdmx
1187
Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1188
This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1189
@samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1190
 
1191
@item -mdsp
1192
@itemx -mno-dsp
1193
Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1194
This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1195
@samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1196
 
1197
@item -mdspr2
1198
@itemx -mno-dspr2
1199
Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1200
This option implies -mdsp.
1201
This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1202
@samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1203
 
1204
@item -mmt
1205
@itemx -mno-mt
1206
Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1207
This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1208
@samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1209
 
1210
@item --construct-floats
1211
@itemx --no-construct-floats
1212
The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1213
double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1214
value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1215
the double width register.  By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1216
selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1217
 
1218
@cindex emulation
1219
@item --emulation=@var{name}
1220
This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured
1221
for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing
1222
between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
1223
debugging information or store symbol table information, and default
1224
endianness.  The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff},
1225
@samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf},
1226
@samp{mipsbelf}.  The first two do not alter the default endianness from that
1227
of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change
1228
the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l}
1229
in the name.  Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness
1230
selection in any case.
1231
 
1232
This option is currently supported only when the primary target
1233
@command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a @sc{mips} ELF or ECOFF target.
1234
Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with
1235
@samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for
1236
the other format, if both are to be available.  For example, the Irix 5
1237
configuration includes support for both.
1238
 
1239
Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
1240
fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for
1241
more processors.
1242
 
1243
@item -nocpp
1244
@command{@value{AS}} ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
1245
the native tools.
1246
 
1247
@item --trap
1248
@itemx --no-trap
1249
@itemx --break
1250
@itemx --no-break
1251
Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1252
@samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1253
(and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1254
@samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1255
break exception.
1256
 
1257
@item -n
1258
When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1259
time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1260
@end table
1261
@end ifset
1262
 
1263
@ifset MCORE
1264
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1265
an MCore processor.
1266
 
1267
@table @gcctabopt
1268
@item -jsri2bsr
1269
@itemx -nojsri2bsr
1270
Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation.  By default this is enabled.
1271
The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1272
 
1273
@item -sifilter
1274
@itemx -nosifilter
1275
Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour.  By default this is disabled.
1276
The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1277
 
1278
@item -relax
1279
Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1280
 
1281
@item -mcpu=[210|340]
1282
Select the cpu type on the target hardware.  This controls which instructions
1283
can be assembled.
1284
 
1285
@item -EB
1286
Assemble for a big endian target.
1287
 
1288
@item -EL
1289
Assemble for a little endian target.
1290
 
1291
@end table
1292
@end ifset
1293
 
1294
@ifset MMIX
1295
See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1296
@end ifset
1297
 
1298
@c man end
1299
@ifset PPC
1300
 
1301
@ifclear man
1302
@xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1303
for a PowerPC processor.
1304
@end ifclear
1305
 
1306
@ifset man
1307
@c man begin OPTIONS
1308
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1309
PowerPC processor.
1310
@c man end
1311
@c man begin INCLUDE
1312
@include c-ppc.texi
1313
@c ended inside the included file
1314
@end ifset
1315
 
1316
@end ifset
1317
 
1318
@c man begin OPTIONS
1319
@ifset RX
1320
See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1321
@end ifset
1322
 
1323
@ifset S390
1324
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1325
processor family.
1326
 
1327
@table @gcctabopt
1328
@item -m31
1329
@itemx -m64
1330
Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1331
@item -mesa
1332
@item -mzarch
1333
Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1334
Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1335
@item -march=@var{processor}
1336
Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1337
@samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, or @samp{z10}.
1338
@item -mregnames
1339
@itemx -mno-regnames
1340
Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1341
@item -mwarn-areg-zero
1342
Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1343
but evaluates to zero.
1344
@end table
1345
@end ifset
1346
@c man end
1347
 
1348
@ifset TIC6X
1349
 
1350
@ifclear man
1351
@xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1352
for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1353
@end ifclear
1354
 
1355
@ifset man
1356
@c man begin OPTIONS
1357
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1358
TMS320C6000 processor.
1359
@c man end
1360
@c man begin INCLUDE
1361
@include c-tic6x.texi
1362
@c ended inside the included file
1363
@end ifset
1364
 
1365
@end ifset
1366
 
1367
@ifset XTENSA
1368
 
1369
@ifclear man
1370
@xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1371
for an Xtensa processor.
1372
@end ifclear
1373
 
1374
@ifset man
1375
@c man begin OPTIONS
1376
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1377
Xtensa processor.
1378
@c man end
1379
@c man begin INCLUDE
1380
@include c-xtensa.texi
1381
@c ended inside the included file
1382
@end ifset
1383
 
1384
@end ifset
1385
 
1386
@c man begin OPTIONS
1387
 
1388
@ifset Z80
1389
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1390
a Z80 family processor.
1391
@table @gcctabopt
1392
@item -z80
1393
Assemble for Z80 processor.
1394
@item -r800
1395
Assemble for R800 processor.
1396
@item  -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1397
@itemx -Wnud
1398
Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1399
@item  -ignore-unportable-instructions
1400
@itemx -Wnup
1401
Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1402
@item  -warn-undocumented-instructions
1403
@itemx -Wud
1404
Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1405
@item  -warn-unportable-instructions
1406
@itemx -Wup
1407
Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1408
@item  -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1409
@itemx -Fud
1410
Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1411
@item  -forbid-unportable-instructions
1412
@itemx -Fup
1413
Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1414
@end table
1415
@end ifset
1416
 
1417
@c man end
1418
 
1419
@menu
1420
* Manual::                      Structure of this Manual
1421
* GNU Assembler::               The GNU Assembler
1422
* Object Formats::              Object File Formats
1423
* Command Line::                Command Line
1424
* Input Files::                 Input Files
1425
* Object::                      Output (Object) File
1426
* Errors::                      Error and Warning Messages
1427
@end menu
1428
 
1429
@node Manual
1430
@section Structure of this Manual
1431
 
1432
@cindex manual, structure and purpose
1433
This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1434
@sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1435
notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1436
@command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1437
 
1438
@ifclear GENERIC
1439
We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1440
configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1441
@end ifclear
1442
@ifset GENERIC
1443
This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1444
various flavors of the assembler.
1445
@end ifset
1446
 
1447
@cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1448
On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1449
to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1450
In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1451
architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1452
mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1453
particular architecture.
1454
@ifset GENERIC
1455
You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1456
machine architecture manual for this information.
1457
@end ifset
1458
@ifclear GENERIC
1459
@ifset H8/300
1460
For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1461
Series Programming Manual}.  For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1462
Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1463
@end ifset
1464
@ifset SH
1465
For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1466
see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1467
@cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1468
@cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1469
@end ifset
1470
@ifset Z8000
1471
For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1472
@end ifset
1473
@end ifclear
1474
 
1475
@c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1476
@ignore
1477
Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1478
the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1479
Foundation, Inc.}.  This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1480
computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1481
once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1482
qualification.
1483
 
1484
@command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1485
human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1486
computer-readable series of instructions.  Different versions of
1487
@command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1488
@end ignore
1489
 
1490
@c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1491
@c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long".  Defining "word" to any
1492
@c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1493
@c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1494
@c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1495
@c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1496
@c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1497
@c directives).
1498
 
1499
@node GNU Assembler
1500
@section The GNU Assembler
1501
 
1502
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1503
 
1504
@sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1505
@ifclear GENERIC
1506
This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1507
configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1508
@end ifclear
1509
If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1510
should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1511
architecture.  Each version has much in common with the others,
1512
including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1513
@dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1514
 
1515
@cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1516
@command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1517
@sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1518
@code{@value{LD}}.  Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1519
assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1520
machine would assemble.
1521
@ifset VAX
1522
Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1523
@end ifset
1524
@ifset M680X0
1525
@c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1526
@c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1527
This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1528
assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1529
incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1530
@end ifset
1531
 
1532
@c man end
1533
 
1534
Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1535
program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
1536
@kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1537
 
1538
@node Object Formats
1539
@section Object File Formats
1540
 
1541
@cindex object file format
1542
The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1543
object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
1544
write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1545
are typically different in different file formats.  @xref{Symbol
1546
Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1547
@ifclear GENERIC
1548
@ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1549
For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1550
@value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1551
@end ifclear
1552
@c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1553
@ifset I960
1554
On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1555
@code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1556
@end ifset
1557
@ifset HPPA
1558
On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1559
SOM or ELF format object files.
1560
@end ifset
1561
@end ifclear
1562
 
1563
@node Command Line
1564
@section Command Line
1565
 
1566
@cindex command line conventions
1567
 
1568
After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1569
options and file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be
1570
before, after, or between file names.  The order of file names is
1571
significant.
1572
 
1573
@cindex standard input, as input file
1574
@kindex --
1575
@file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1576
explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1577
 
1578
@cindex options, command line
1579
Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1580
hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of
1581
@command{@value{AS}}.  No option changes the way another option works.  An
1582
option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1583
the letter is important.   All options are optional.
1584
 
1585
Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
1586
name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1587
with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1588
standard).  These two command lines are equivalent:
1589
 
1590
@smallexample
1591
@value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1592
@value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1593
@end smallexample
1594
 
1595
@node Input Files
1596
@section Input Files
1597
 
1598
@cindex input
1599
@cindex source program
1600
@cindex files, input
1601
We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1602
describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}.  The program may
1603
be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1604
doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1605
 
1606
@c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1607
@c APL training...   doc@cygnus.com
1608
The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1609
order specified.
1610
 
1611
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1612
Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1613
program.  The source program is made up of one or more files.
1614
(The standard input is also a file.)
1615
 
1616
You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1617
names.  The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A
1618
command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1619
is taken to be an input file name.
1620
 
1621
If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1622
from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You
1623
may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1624
to assemble.
1625
 
1626
Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1627
in your command line.
1628
 
1629
If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1630
file.
1631
 
1632
@c man end
1633
 
1634
@subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1635
 
1636
@cindex input file linenumbers
1637
@cindex line numbers, in input files
1638
There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1639
either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a line
1640
number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1641
``logical'' file.  @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1642
 
1643
@dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1644
to @command{@value{AS}}.
1645
 
1646
@dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1647
directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names help
1648
error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1649
is itself synthesized from other files.  @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1650
@samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor.  See also
1651
@ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1652
 
1653
@node Object
1654
@section Output (Object) File
1655
 
1656
@cindex object file
1657
@cindex output file
1658
@kindex a.out
1659
@kindex .o
1660
Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1661
your assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file
1662
is the object file.  Its default name is
1663
@ifclear BOUT
1664
@code{a.out}.
1665
@end ifclear
1666
@ifset BOUT
1667
@ifset GENERIC
1668
@code{a.out}, or
1669
@end ifset
1670
@code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1671
@end ifset
1672
You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option.  Conventionally,
1673
object file names end with @file{.o}.  The default name is used for historical
1674
reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1675
directly into a runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently
1676
possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1677
 
1678
@cindex linker
1679
@kindex ld
1680
The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}.  It contains
1681
assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1682
the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1683
information for the debugger.
1684
 
1685
@c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1686
@c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1687
 
1688
@node Errors
1689
@section Error and Warning Messages
1690
 
1691
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1692
 
1693
@cindex error messages
1694
@cindex warning messages
1695
@cindex messages from assembler
1696
@command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1697
file (usually your terminal).  This should not happen when  a compiler
1698
runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so
1699
that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1700
grave problem that stops the assembly.
1701
 
1702
@c man end
1703
 
1704
@cindex format of warning messages
1705
Warning messages have the format
1706
 
1707
@smallexample
1708
file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1709
@end smallexample
1710
 
1711
@noindent
1712
@cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1713
(where @b{NNN} is a line number).  If a logical file name has been given
1714
(@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1715
the current input file is used.  If a logical line number was given
1716
@ifset GENERIC
1717
(@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1718
@end ifset
1719
then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1720
otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed.  The
1721
message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1722
tradition).
1723
 
1724
@cindex format of error messages
1725
Error messages have the format
1726
@smallexample
1727
file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1728
@end smallexample
1729
The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1730
messages.  The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1731
because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1732
 
1733
@node Invoking
1734
@chapter Command-Line Options
1735
 
1736
@cindex options, all versions of assembler
1737
This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1738
versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1739
for options specific
1740
@ifclear GENERIC
1741
to the @value{TARGET} target.
1742
@end ifclear
1743
@ifset GENERIC
1744
to particular machine architectures.
1745
@end ifset
1746
 
1747
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1748
 
1749
If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1750
you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1751
The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1752
by commas.  For example:
1753
 
1754
@smallexample
1755
gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1756
@end smallexample
1757
 
1758
@noindent
1759
This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1760
standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1761
local symbols in the symbol table).
1762
 
1763
Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1764
command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1765
(You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1766
precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1767
assembler.)
1768
 
1769
@c man end
1770
 
1771
@menu
1772
* a::             -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1773
* alternate::     --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1774
* D::             -D for compatibility
1775
* f::             -f to work faster
1776
* I::             -I for .include search path
1777
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1778
* K::             -K for compatibility
1779
@end ifclear
1780
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1781
* K::             -K for difference tables
1782
@end ifset
1783
 
1784
* L::             -L to retain local symbols
1785
* listing::       --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1786
* M::             -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1787
* MD::            --MD for dependency tracking
1788
* o::             -o to name the object file
1789
* R::             -R to join data and text sections
1790
* statistics::    --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1791
* traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1792
* v::             -v to announce version
1793
* W::             -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1794
* Z::             -Z to make object file even after errors
1795
@end menu
1796
 
1797
@node a
1798
@section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1799
 
1800
@kindex -a
1801
@kindex -ac
1802
@kindex -ad
1803
@kindex -ag
1804
@kindex -ah
1805
@kindex -al
1806
@kindex -an
1807
@kindex -as
1808
@cindex listings, enabling
1809
@cindex assembly listings, enabling
1810
 
1811
These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself,
1812
@samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1813
You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1814
@samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1815
@samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1816
@samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1817
High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1818
@samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1819
also.
1820
 
1821
Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1822
information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
1823
 
1824
Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any lines
1825
which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
1826
other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
1827
omitted from the listing.
1828
 
1829
Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
1830
listing.
1831
 
1832
Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
1833
listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
1834
@code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
1835
@code{.sbttl}.
1836
The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
1837
If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
1838
listing-control directives have no effect.
1839
 
1840
The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
1841
@emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
1842
 
1843
Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
1844
because it
1845
is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
1846
is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
1847
directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
1848
stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler.  This reduces
1849
memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
1850
 
1851
@node alternate
1852
@section @option{--alternate}
1853
 
1854
@kindex --alternate
1855
Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
1856
 
1857
@node D
1858
@section @option{-D}
1859
 
1860
@kindex -D
1861
This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
1862
likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
1863
@command{@value{AS}}.
1864
 
1865
@node f
1866
@section Work Faster: @option{-f}
1867
 
1868
@kindex -f
1869
@cindex trusted compiler
1870
@cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
1871
@samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
1872
(trusted) compiler.  @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
1873
and comment preprocessing on
1874
the input file(s) before assembling them.  @xref{Preprocessing,
1875
,Preprocessing}.
1876
 
1877
@quotation
1878
@emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
1879
preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
1880
not work correctly.
1881
@end quotation
1882
 
1883
@node I
1884
@section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
1885
 
1886
@kindex -I @var{path}
1887
@cindex paths for @code{.include}
1888
@cindex search path for @code{.include}
1889
@cindex @code{include} directive search path
1890
Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
1891
@command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
1892
directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You may use @option{-I} as
1893
many times as necessary to include a variety of paths.  The current
1894
working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
1895
searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
1896
specified (left to right) on the command line.
1897
 
1898
@node K
1899
@section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
1900
 
1901
@kindex -K
1902
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1903
On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect.  It is
1904
permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
1905
where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
1906
generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables.  The @value{TARGET}
1907
family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
1908
alteration on other platforms.
1909
@end ifclear
1910
 
1911
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1912
@cindex difference tables, warning
1913
@cindex warning for altered difference tables
1914
@command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
1915
form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
1916
You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
1917
is done.
1918
@end ifset
1919
 
1920
@node L
1921
@section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
1922
 
1923
@kindex -L
1924
@cindex local symbols, retaining in output
1925
Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
1926
@samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
1927
called @dfn{local symbols}.  @xref{Symbol Names}.  Normally you do not see
1928
such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
1929
programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
1930
notice.  Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
1931
such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
1932
 
1933
This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
1934
in the object file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
1935
@code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
1936
 
1937
@node listing
1938
@section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
1939
 
1940
The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
1941
@samp{-a} (@pxref{a}).  This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
1942
hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
1943
them as a listing file.  The format of this listing can be controlled by
1944
directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
1945
@code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
1946
@code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
1947
@code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
1948
 
1949
@table @gcctabopt
1950
@item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
1951
@kindex --listing-lhs-width
1952
@cindex Width of first line disassembly output
1953
Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump.  This
1954
dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
1955
 
1956
@item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
1957
@kindex --listing-lhs-width2
1958
@cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
1959
Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
1960
a given input source line.  If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
1961
the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}.  If neither
1962
switch is used the default is to one.
1963
 
1964
@item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
1965
@kindex --listing-rhs-width
1966
@cindex Width of source line output
1967
Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
1968
alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this parameter is 100.  The
1969
source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
1970
 
1971
@item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
1972
@kindex --listing-cont-lines
1973
@cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
1974
Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
1975
displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default value is 4.
1976
@end table
1977
 
1978
@node M
1979
@section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
1980
 
1981
@kindex -M
1982
@cindex MRI compatibility mode
1983
The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This
1984
changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
1985
compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
1986
configured target) assembler from Microtec Research.  The exact nature of the
1987
MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
1988
information.  Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
1989
arguments is somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit
1990
assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
1991
 
1992
The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI assembler
1993
depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
1994
file formats.  Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
1995
individually.  These are:
1996
 
1997
@itemize @bullet
1998
@item global symbols in common section
1999
 
2000
The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2001
Other object file formats do not support this.  @command{@value{AS}} handles
2002
common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.  It permits local
2003
symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2004
symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2005
 
2006
@item complex relocations
2007
 
2008
The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2009
relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections.  These
2010
are not support by other object file formats.
2011
 
2012
@item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2013
 
2014
The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2015
This is not supported by other object file formats.  The start address may
2016
instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2017
script.
2018
 
2019
@item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2020
 
2021
The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2022
name to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file formats.
2023
 
2024
@item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2025
 
2026
The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2027
address.  This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2028
which changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections are
2029
not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a section may be
2030
assigned within a linker script.
2031
@end itemize
2032
 
2033
There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2034
@command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2035
seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2036
 
2037
@itemize @bullet
2038
 
2039
@item EBCDIC strings
2040
 
2041
EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2042
 
2043
@item packed binary coded decimal
2044
 
2045
Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the @code{DC.P}
2046
and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2047
 
2048
@item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2049
 
2050
The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2051
 
2052
@item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2053
 
2054
The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2055
 
2056
@item @code{OPT} branch control options
2057
 
2058
The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2059
@code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2060
relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2061
these options serve no purpose.
2062
 
2063
@item @code{OPT} list control options
2064
 
2065
The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2066
@code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2067
@code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2068
 
2069
@item other @code{OPT} options
2070
 
2071
The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2072
@code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2073
 
2074
@item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2075
 
2076
The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2077
@code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2078
 
2079
@item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2080
 
2081
The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2082
 
2083
@item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2084
 
2085
The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2086
 
2087
@item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2088
 
2089
The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2090
 
2091
@item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2092
 
2093
The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2094
 
2095
@item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2096
 
2097
The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2098
 
2099
@item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2100
 
2101
The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2102
 
2103
@item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2104
 
2105
The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2106
 
2107
@end itemize
2108
 
2109
@node MD
2110
@section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2111
 
2112
@kindex --MD
2113
@cindex dependency tracking
2114
@cindex make rules
2115
 
2116
@command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This
2117
file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2118
dependencies of the main source file.
2119
 
2120
The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2121
 
2122
This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2123
 
2124
@node o
2125
@section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2126
 
2127
@kindex -o
2128
@cindex naming object file
2129
@cindex object file name
2130
There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}.  By
2131
default it has the name
2132
@ifset GENERIC
2133
@ifset I960
2134
@file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2135
@end ifset
2136
@ifclear I960
2137
@file{a.out}.
2138
@end ifclear
2139
@end ifset
2140
@ifclear GENERIC
2141
@ifset I960
2142
@file{b.out}.
2143
@end ifset
2144
@ifclear I960
2145
@file{a.out}.
2146
@end ifclear
2147
@end ifclear
2148
You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2149
object file a different name.
2150
 
2151
Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2152
existing file of the same name.
2153
 
2154
@node R
2155
@section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2156
 
2157
@kindex -R
2158
@cindex data and text sections, joining
2159
@cindex text and data sections, joining
2160
@cindex joining text and data sections
2161
@cindex merging text and data sections
2162
@option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2163
data-section data lives in the text section.  This is only done at
2164
the very last moment:  your binary data are the same, but data
2165
section parts are relocated differently.  The data section part of
2166
your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2167
appended to the text section.  (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2168
 
2169
When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2170
address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2171
data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2172
older versions of @command{@value{AS}}.  In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2173
 
2174
@ifset COFF-ELF
2175
When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2176
this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2177
@samp{.data}.
2178
@end ifset
2179
 
2180
@ifset HPPA
2181
@option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets.  Using
2182
@option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2183
@end ifset
2184
 
2185
@node statistics
2186
@section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2187
 
2188
@kindex --statistics
2189
@cindex statistics, about assembly
2190
@cindex time, total for assembly
2191
@cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2192
Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2193
@command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2194
(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2195
seconds).
2196
 
2197
@node traditional-format
2198
@section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2199
 
2200
@kindex --traditional-format
2201
For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2202
from the output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests
2203
@command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2204
 
2205
For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2206
@command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2207
 
2208
@node v
2209
@section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2210
 
2211
@kindex -v
2212
@kindex -version
2213
@cindex assembler version
2214
@cindex version of assembler
2215
You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2216
option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2217
command line.
2218
 
2219
@node W
2220
@section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2221
 
2222
@command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2223
assembling compiler output.  But programs written by people often
2224
cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2225
made.  All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2226
 
2227
@kindex -W
2228
@kindex --no-warn
2229
@cindex suppressing warnings
2230
@cindex warnings, suppressing
2231
If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2232
This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2233
how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the assembly,
2234
are still reported.
2235
 
2236
@kindex --fatal-warnings
2237
@cindex errors, caused by warnings
2238
@cindex warnings, causing error
2239
If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2240
files that generate warnings to be in error.
2241
 
2242
@kindex --warn
2243
@cindex warnings, switching on
2244
You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2245
causes warnings to be output as usual.
2246
 
2247
@node Z
2248
@section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2249
@cindex object file, after errors
2250
@cindex errors, continuing after
2251
After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output.  If for
2252
some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2253
@command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2254
option.  If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2255
writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2256
errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2257
 
2258
@node Syntax
2259
@chapter Syntax
2260
 
2261
@cindex machine-independent syntax
2262
@cindex syntax, machine-independent
2263
This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2264
source file.  @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2265
assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2266
@ifclear VAX
2267
assembler.
2268
@end ifclear
2269
@ifset VAX
2270
assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2271
@end ifset
2272
 
2273
@menu
2274
* Preprocessing::               Preprocessing
2275
* Whitespace::                  Whitespace
2276
* Comments::                    Comments
2277
* Symbol Intro::                Symbols
2278
* Statements::                  Statements
2279
* Constants::                   Constants
2280
@end menu
2281
 
2282
@node Preprocessing
2283
@section Preprocessing
2284
 
2285
@cindex preprocessing
2286
The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2287
@itemize @bullet
2288
@cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2289
@item
2290
adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab before
2291
the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2292
a single space.
2293
 
2294
@cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2295
@item
2296
removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2297
appropriate number of newlines.
2298
 
2299
@cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2300
@item
2301
converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2302
@end itemize
2303
 
2304
It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2305
anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can
2306
do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2307
(@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2308
to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2309
@samp{.S} suffix.  @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2310
Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2311
 
2312
Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2313
cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2314
preprocessed.
2315
 
2316
@cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2317
@cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2318
@kindex #NO_APP
2319
@kindex #APP
2320
If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2321
@samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2322
Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2323
specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2324
text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2325
@code{#NO_APP} after this text.  This feature is mainly intend to support
2326
@code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2327
and whitespace.
2328
 
2329
@node Whitespace
2330
@section Whitespace
2331
 
2332
@cindex whitespace
2333
@dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2334
Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2335
people to read.  Unless within character constants
2336
(@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2337
as exactly one space.
2338
 
2339
@node Comments
2340
@section Comments
2341
 
2342
@cindex comments
2343
There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}.  In both
2344
cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2345
 
2346
Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2347
This means you may not nest these comments.
2348
 
2349
@smallexample
2350
/*
2351
  The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2352
  is to use this sort of comment.
2353
*/
2354
 
2355
/* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2356
@end smallexample
2357
 
2358
@cindex line comment character
2359
Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2360
considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is target
2361
specific, and some targets multiple comment characters.  Some targets also have
2362
line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2363
line.  Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2364
comment.  Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2365
upon command line options that have been used.  For more details see the
2366
@emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2367
 
2368
If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2369
special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2370
to specify logical line numbers:
2371
 
2372
@kindex #
2373
@cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2374
@cindex logical line numbers
2375
To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2376
special interpretation.  Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2377
expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2378
line.  Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2379
new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2380
 
2381
If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2382
the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
2383
 
2384
@smallexample
2385
                          # This is an ordinary comment.
2386
# 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
2387
                          # This is logical line # 36.
2388
@end smallexample
2389
This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2390
of @command{@value{AS}}.
2391
 
2392
@node Symbol Intro
2393
@section Symbols
2394
 
2395
@cindex characters used in symbols
2396
@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2397
A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2398
letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2399
@samp{_.$}.
2400
@end ifclear
2401
@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2402
@ifclear GENERIC
2403
@ifset H8
2404
A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2405
letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2406
@samp{._$}.  (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2407
symbol names.)
2408
@end ifset
2409
@end ifclear
2410
@end ifset
2411
@ifset GENERIC
2412
On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2413
are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2414
@end ifset
2415
No symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.
2416
There is no length limit: all characters are significant.  Symbols are
2417
delimited by characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file
2418
(since the source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is
2419
not a possible symbol delimiter).  @xref{Symbols}.
2420
@cindex length of symbols
2421
 
2422
@node Statements
2423
@section Statements
2424
 
2425
@cindex statements, structure of
2426
@cindex line separator character
2427
@cindex statement separator character
2428
 
2429
A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2430
@dfn{line separator character}.  The line separator character is target
2431
specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2432
target's documentation.  Not all targets support a line separator character.
2433
The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2434
preceding statement.  Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2435
exception: they do not end statements.
2436
 
2437
@cindex newline, required at file end
2438
@cindex EOF, newline must precede
2439
It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file:  the last
2440
character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2441
 
2442
An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is ignored.
2443
 
2444
@cindex instructions and directives
2445
@cindex directives and instructions
2446
@c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2447
@c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously...  doc@cygnus.com,
2448
@c 13feb91.
2449
A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2450
key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
2451
symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
2452
symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2453
directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
2454
a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2455
assembles into a machine language instruction.
2456
@ifset GENERIC
2457
Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2458
recognize different instructions.  In fact, the same symbol may
2459
represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2460
language.@refill
2461
@end ifset
2462
 
2463
@cindex @code{:} (label)
2464
@cindex label (@code{:})
2465
A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2466
Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2467
have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2468
 
2469
@ifset HPPA
2470
For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2471
the definition of a label must begin in column zero.  This also implies that
2472
only one label may be defined on each line.
2473
@end ifset
2474
 
2475
@smallexample
2476
label:     .directive    followed by something
2477
another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
2478
           instruction   operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2479
@end smallexample
2480
 
2481
@node Constants
2482
@section Constants
2483
 
2484
@cindex constants
2485
A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2486
inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
2487
@smallexample
2488
@group
2489
.byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2490
.ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
2491
.octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2492
.float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2493
95028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
2494
@end group
2495
@end smallexample
2496
 
2497
@menu
2498
* Characters::                  Character Constants
2499
* Numbers::                     Number Constants
2500
@end menu
2501
 
2502
@node Characters
2503
@subsection Character Constants
2504
 
2505
@cindex character constants
2506
@cindex constants, character
2507
There are two kinds of character constants.  A @dfn{character} stands
2508
for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2509
numeric expressions.  String constants (properly called string
2510
@emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2511
used in arithmetic expressions.
2512
 
2513
@menu
2514
* Strings::                     Strings
2515
* Chars::                       Characters
2516
@end menu
2517
 
2518
@node Strings
2519
@subsubsection Strings
2520
 
2521
@cindex string constants
2522
@cindex constants, string
2523
A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
2524
double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
2525
into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2526
a backslash @samp{\} character.  For example @samp{\\} represents
2527
one backslash:  the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2528
@command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2529
(which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2530
escape character).  The complete list of escapes follows.
2531
 
2532
@cindex escape codes, character
2533
@cindex character escape codes
2534
@table @kbd
2535
@c      @item \a
2536
@c      Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2537
@c
2538
@cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2539
@cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2540
@item \b
2541
Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2542
 
2543
@c      @item \e
2544
@c      Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2545
@c
2546
@cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2547
@cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2548
@item \f
2549
Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2550
 
2551
@cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2552
@cindex newline (@code{\n})
2553
@item \n
2554
Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2555
 
2556
@c      @item \p
2557
@c      Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2558
@c
2559
@cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2560
@cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2561
@item \r
2562
Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2563
 
2564
@c      @item \s
2565
@c      Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040.  Included for compliance with
2566
@c      other assemblers.
2567
@c
2568
@cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2569
@cindex tab (@code{\t})
2570
@item \t
2571
Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2572
 
2573
@c      @item \v
2574
@c      Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2575
@c      @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2576
@c      A hexadecimal character code.  The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2577
@c
2578
@cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2579
@cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2580
@item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2581
An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2582
For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2583
for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2584
 
2585
@cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2586
@cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2587
@item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2588
A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.  Either upper or
2589
lower case @code{x} works.
2590
 
2591
@cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2592
@cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2593
@item \\
2594
Represents one @samp{\} character.
2595
 
2596
@c      @item \'
2597
@c      Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2598
@c      This is needed in single character literals
2599
@c      (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2600
@c      a @samp{'}.
2601
@c
2602
@cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2603
@cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2604
@item \"
2605
Represents one @samp{"} character.  Needed in strings to represent
2606
this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2607
 
2608
@item \ @var{anything-else}
2609
Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2610
assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present.  The idea is that if
2611
you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2612
interpretation of the following character.  However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2613
other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2614
code and warns you of the fact.
2615
@end table
2616
 
2617
Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2618
varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think
2619
the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2620
compilers recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2621
sequence.
2622
 
2623
@node Chars
2624
@subsubsection Characters
2625
 
2626
@cindex single character constant
2627
@cindex character, single
2628
@cindex constant, single character
2629
A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2630
followed by that character.  The same escapes apply to characters as
2631
to strings.  So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2632
must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2633
@code{\}.  As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2634
grave accent.  A newline
2635
@ifclear GENERIC
2636
@ifclear abnormal-separator
2637
(or semicolon @samp{;})
2638
@end ifclear
2639
@ifset abnormal-separator
2640
@ifset H8
2641
(or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2642
Renesas SH)
2643
@end ifset
2644
@end ifset
2645
@end ifclear
2646
immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2647
and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
2648
constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2649
that character.  @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2650
@kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2651
 
2652
@node Numbers
2653
@subsection Number Constants
2654
 
2655
@cindex constants, number
2656
@cindex number constants
2657
@command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2658
are stored in the target machine.  @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2659
would fit into an @code{int} in the C language.  @emph{Bignums} are
2660
integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits.  @emph{Flonums}
2661
are floating point numbers, described below.
2662
 
2663
@menu
2664
* Integers::                    Integers
2665
* Bignums::                     Bignums
2666
* Flonums::                     Flonums
2667
@ifclear GENERIC
2668
@ifset I960
2669
* Bit Fields::                  Bit Fields
2670
@end ifset
2671
@end ifclear
2672
@end menu
2673
 
2674
@node Integers
2675
@subsubsection Integers
2676
@cindex integers
2677
@cindex constants, integer
2678
 
2679
@cindex binary integers
2680
@cindex integers, binary
2681
A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2682
the binary digits @samp{01}.
2683
 
2684
@cindex octal integers
2685
@cindex integers, octal
2686
An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2687
digits (@samp{01234567}).
2688
 
2689
@cindex decimal integers
2690
@cindex integers, decimal
2691
A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2692
more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2693
 
2694
@cindex hexadecimal integers
2695
@cindex integers, hexadecimal
2696
A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2697
more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2698
 
2699
Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
2700
the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2701
(@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2702
 
2703
@node Bignums
2704
@subsubsection Bignums
2705
 
2706
@cindex bignums
2707
@cindex constants, bignum
2708
A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2709
except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2710
represent in binary.  The distinction is made because in some places
2711
integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2712
 
2713
@node Flonums
2714
@subsubsection Flonums
2715
@cindex flonums
2716
@cindex floating point numbers
2717
@cindex constants, floating point
2718
 
2719
@cindex precision, floating point
2720
A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number.  The translation is
2721
indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2722
@command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2723
sufficient precision.  This generic floating point number is converted
2724
to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2725
portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2726
 
2727
A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2728
@itemize @bullet
2729
@item
2730
The digit @samp{0}.
2731
@ifset HPPA
2732
(@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2733
@end ifset
2734
 
2735
@item
2736
A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2737
@ifset GENERIC
2738
@kbd{e} is recommended.  Case is not important.
2739
@ignore
2740
@c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2741
(Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed.  Vax BSD
2742
4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2743
@end ignore
2744
 
2745
On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2746
and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2747
one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2748
 
2749
On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2750
(in upper or lower case).
2751
 
2752
On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2753
one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2754
 
2755
On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2756
@end ifset
2757
@ifclear GENERIC
2758
@ifset ARC
2759
One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2760
@end ifset
2761
@ifset H8
2762
One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2763
@end ifset
2764
@ifset HPPA
2765
The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2766
@end ifset
2767
@ifset I960
2768
One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2769
@end ifset
2770
@end ifclear
2771
 
2772
@item
2773
An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2774
 
2775
@item
2776
An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2777
 
2778
@item
2779
An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2780
or more decimal digits.
2781
 
2782
@item
2783
An optional exponent, consisting of:
2784
 
2785
@itemize @bullet
2786
@item
2787
An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2788
@c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2789
@c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2790
@item
2791
Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2792
@item
2793
One or more decimal digits.
2794
@end itemize
2795
 
2796
@end itemize
2797
 
2798
At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2799
present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2800
 
2801
@command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
2802
independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2803
@command{@value{AS}}.
2804
 
2805
@ifclear GENERIC
2806
@ifset I960
2807
@c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2808
@c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2809
@c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2810
@node Bit Fields
2811
@subsubsection Bit Fields
2812
 
2813
@cindex bit fields
2814
@cindex constants, bit field
2815
You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2816
Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2817
@example
2818
@var{mask}:@var{value}
2819
@end example
2820
@noindent
2821
@command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2822
@var{value}.
2823
 
2824
The resulting number is then packed
2825
@ifset GENERIC
2826
@c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
2827
(in host-dependent byte order)
2828
@end ifset
2829
into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
2830
bit-field as its argument.  Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
2831
requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
2832
more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
2833
least significant digits.@refill
2834
 
2835
The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
2836
@code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
2837
@end ifset
2838
@end ifclear
2839
 
2840
@node Sections
2841
@chapter Sections and Relocation
2842
@cindex sections
2843
@cindex relocation
2844
 
2845
@menu
2846
* Secs Background::             Background
2847
* Ld Sections::                 Linker Sections
2848
* As Sections::                 Assembler Internal Sections
2849
* Sub-Sections::                Sub-Sections
2850
* bss::                         bss Section
2851
@end menu
2852
 
2853
@node Secs Background
2854
@section Background
2855
 
2856
Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
2857
``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
2858
For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
2859
 
2860
@cindex linker, and assembler
2861
@cindex assembler, and linker
2862
The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
2863
combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When @command{@value{AS}}
2864
emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
2865
@code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
2866
different partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
2867
oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
2868
sections.
2869
 
2870
@code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
2871
addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
2872
units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
2873
within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}.  Assigning
2874
run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}.  It includes
2875
the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
2876
the proper run-time addresses.
2877
@ifset H8
2878
For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
2879
@command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
2880
ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
2881
@end ifset
2882
 
2883
@cindex standard assembler sections
2884
An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
2885
of which may be empty.  These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
2886
@dfn{bss} sections.
2887
 
2888
@ifset COFF-ELF
2889
@ifset GENERIC
2890
When it generates COFF or ELF output,
2891
@end ifset
2892
@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
2893
using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
2894
If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
2895
or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
2896
@end ifset
2897
 
2898
@ifset HPPA
2899
@ifset GENERIC
2900
When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
2901
@end ifset
2902
@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
2903
specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives.  See
2904
@cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
2905
(HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
2906
assembler directives.
2907
 
2908
@ifset SOM
2909
Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
2910
text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output.  Program text
2911
is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
2912
BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
2913
@end ifset
2914
@end ifset
2915
 
2916
Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
2917
data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
2918
 
2919
@ifset HPPA
2920
When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
2921
section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
2922
@code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
2923
@end ifset
2924
 
2925
To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
2926
relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
2927
object file details of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation
2928
@code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
2929
file is mentioned:
2930
@itemize @bullet
2931
@item
2932
Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
2933
an address?
2934
@item
2935
How long (in bytes) is this reference?
2936
@item
2937
Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value of
2938
@display
2939
(@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
2940
@end display
2941
@item
2942
Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
2943
@end itemize
2944
 
2945
@cindex addresses, format of
2946
@cindex section-relative addressing
2947
In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
2948
@display
2949
(@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
2950
@end display
2951
@noindent
2952
Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
2953
nature.
2954
@ifset SOM
2955
(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
2956
symbol-relative instead.)
2957
@end ifset
2958
 
2959
In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
2960
@var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
2961
 
2962
Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
2963
@dfn{absolute} section.  When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
2964
addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address
2965
@code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
2966
@code{@value{LD}}.  Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
2967
data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
2968
their absolute sections must overlap.  Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
2969
part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
2970
address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
2971
 
2972
The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section.  Any
2973
address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
2974
rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
2975
Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
2976
address is to mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named
2977
common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
2978
time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
2979
 
2980
By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
2981
the linked program.  @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
2982
sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is
2983
customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
2984
the addresses of all partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for
2985
data and bss sections.
2986
 
2987
Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
2988
use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
2989
 
2990
@node Ld Sections
2991
@section Linker Sections
2992
@code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
2993
 
2994
@table @strong
2995
 
2996
@ifset COFF-ELF
2997
@cindex named sections
2998
@cindex sections, named
2999
@item named sections
3000
@end ifset
3001
@ifset aout-bout
3002
@cindex text section
3003
@cindex data section
3004
@itemx text section
3005
@itemx data section
3006
@end ifset
3007
These sections hold your program.  @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3008
separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section is
3009
true of another.
3010
@c @ifset aout-bout
3011
When the program is running, however, it is
3012
customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The
3013
text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3014
instructions, constants and the like.  The data section of a running
3015
program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3016
in the data section.
3017
@c @end ifset
3018
 
3019
@cindex bss section
3020
@item bss section
3021
This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running.  It
3022
is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage.  The length of
3023
each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3024
out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3025
bytes in the object file.  The bss section was invented to eliminate
3026
those explicit zeros from object files.
3027
 
3028
@cindex absolute section
3029
@item absolute section
3030
Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3031
This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3032
not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of absolute
3033
addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3034
 
3035
@cindex undefined section
3036
@item undefined section
3037
This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3038
the preceding sections.
3039
@c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3040
@end table
3041
 
3042
@cindex relocation example
3043
An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3044
@ifset COFF-ELF
3045
The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3046
@end ifset
3047
Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3048
 
3049
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3050
@ifnottex
3051
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3052
@smallexample
3053
                      +-----+----+--+
3054
partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
3055
                      +-----+----+--+
3056
 
3057
                      text   data bss
3058
                      seg.   seg. seg.
3059
 
3060
                      +---+---+---+
3061
partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
3062
                      +---+---+---+
3063
 
3064
                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3065
linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
3066
                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3067
 
3068
    addresses:        0 @dots{}
3069
@end smallexample
3070
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3071
@end ifnottex
3072
@need 5000
3073
@tex
3074
\bigskip
3075
\line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3076
\line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3077
\line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3078
 
3079
\line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3080
\line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3081
\line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3082
 
3083
\line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3084
\line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3085
\line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3086
ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3087
DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3088
 
3089
\line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3090
\line{0\dots\hfil}
3091
 
3092
@end tex
3093
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3094
 
3095
@node As Sections
3096
@section Assembler Internal Sections
3097
 
3098
@cindex internal assembler sections
3099
@cindex sections in messages, internal
3100
These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}.  They
3101
have no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
3102
sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3103
warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3104
meanings to @command{@value{AS}}.  These sections are used to permit the
3105
value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3106
section-relative address.
3107
 
3108
@table @b
3109
@cindex assembler internal logic error
3110
@item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3111
An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there is a
3112
bug in the assembler.
3113
 
3114
@cindex expr (internal section)
3115
@item expr section
3116
The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3117
symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3118
it in the expr section.
3119
@c FIXME item debug
3120
@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3121
@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3122
@c FIXME item register
3123
@end table
3124
 
3125
@node Sub-Sections
3126
@section Sub-Sections
3127
 
3128
@cindex numbered subsections
3129
@cindex grouping data
3130
@ifset aout-bout
3131
Assembled bytes
3132
@ifset COFF-ELF
3133
conventionally
3134
@end ifset
3135
fall into two sections: text and data.
3136
@end ifset
3137
You may have separate groups of
3138
@ifset GENERIC
3139
data in named sections
3140
@end ifset
3141
@ifclear GENERIC
3142
@ifclear aout-bout
3143
data in named sections
3144
@end ifclear
3145
@ifset aout-bout
3146
text or data
3147
@end ifset
3148
@end ifclear
3149
that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3150
are not contiguous in the assembler source.  @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3151
use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
3152
numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into the
3153
same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3154
subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3155
section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3156
assembled.  In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3157
section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3158
constants being output.
3159
 
3160
Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
3161
goes in subsection number zero.
3162
 
3163
@ifset GENERIC
3164
Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3165
(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3166
of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3167
@end ifset
3168
@ifclear GENERIC
3169
@ifset H8
3170
On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3171
boundary (two bytes).
3172
The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3173
@end ifset
3174
@ifset I960
3175
@c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3176
@c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3177
@c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3178
@c so for now I say nothing about it.  If this is a generic BFD issue,
3179
@c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3180
@c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3181
@end ifset
3182
@end ifclear
3183
 
3184
Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3185
to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3186
The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3187
other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3188
They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3189
data subsections as a data section.
3190
 
3191
To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3192
into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3193
@var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3194
@ifset COFF
3195
@ifset GENERIC
3196
When generating COFF output, you
3197
@end ifset
3198
@ifclear GENERIC
3199
You
3200
@end ifclear
3201
can also use an extra subsection
3202
argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3203
@var{expression}}.
3204
@end ifset
3205
@ifset ELF
3206
@ifset GENERIC
3207
When generating ELF output, you
3208
@end ifset
3209
@ifclear GENERIC
3210
You
3211
@end ifclear
3212
can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3213
to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3214
@end ifset
3215
@var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3216
(@pxref{Expressions}).  If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3217
is assumed.  Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}.  Assembly
3218
begins in @code{text 0}.  For instance:
3219
@smallexample
3220
.text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3221
.ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3222
.text 1
3223
.ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3224
.data 0
3225
.ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3226
.ascii "in the first data subsection."
3227
.text 0
3228
.ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3229
.ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3230
@end smallexample
3231
 
3232
Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3233
assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a convenience
3234
restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3235
counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3236
@code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3237
current value.  The location counter of the section where statements are being
3238
assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3239
 
3240
@node bss
3241
@section bss Section
3242
 
3243
@cindex bss section
3244
@cindex common variable storage
3245
The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3246
You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3247
not dictate data to load into it before your program executes.  When
3248
your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3249
section are zeroed bytes.
3250
 
3251
The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3252
@ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3253
 
3254
The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3255
another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3256
 
3257
@ifset GENERIC
3258
When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3259
COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3260
see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}.  You may only assemble zero values into the
3261
section.  Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3262
@code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3263
@end ifset
3264
 
3265
@node Symbols
3266
@chapter Symbols
3267
 
3268
@cindex symbols
3269
Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3270
things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3271
to debug.
3272
 
3273
@quotation
3274
@cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3275
@emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3276
the same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
3277
@end quotation
3278
 
3279
@menu
3280
* Labels::                      Labels
3281
* Setting Symbols::             Giving Symbols Other Values
3282
* Symbol Names::                Symbol Names
3283
* Dot::                         The Special Dot Symbol
3284
* Symbol Attributes::           Symbol Attributes
3285
@end menu
3286
 
3287
@node Labels
3288
@section Labels
3289
 
3290
@cindex labels
3291
A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3292
@samp{:}.  The symbol then represents the current value of the
3293
active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3294
operand.  You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3295
different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3296
definitions.
3297
 
3298
@ifset HPPA
3299
On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3300
colon, but instead must start in column zero.  Only one label may be defined on
3301
a single line.  To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3302
provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3303
@end ifset
3304
 
3305
@node Setting Symbols
3306
@section Giving Symbols Other Values
3307
 
3308
@cindex assigning values to symbols
3309
@cindex symbol values, assigning
3310
A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3311
by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3312
(@pxref{Expressions}).  This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3313
directive.  @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}.  In the same way, using a double
3314
equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3315
@code{.eqv} directive.  @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3316
 
3317
@ifset Blackfin
3318
Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3319
@end ifset
3320
 
3321
@node Symbol Names
3322
@section Symbol Names
3323
 
3324
@cindex symbol names
3325
@cindex names, symbol
3326
@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3327
Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On most
3328
machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3329
noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.  That character may be followed by any
3330
string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3331
particular target machine), and underscores.
3332
@end ifclear
3333
@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3334
@ifset H8
3335
Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On the
3336
Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names.  That
3337
character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3338
on the H8/300), and underscores.
3339
@end ifset
3340
@end ifset
3341
 
3342
Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3343
than @code{Foo}.
3344
 
3345
Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language program
3346
refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any number of times
3347
in a program.
3348
 
3349
@subheading Local Symbol Names
3350
 
3351
@cindex local symbol names
3352
@cindex symbol names, local
3353
A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3354
By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3355
@samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3356
set of local label prefixes.
3357
@ifset HPPA
3358
On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3359
@end ifset
3360
 
3361
Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3362
normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3363
You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3364
@option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3365
 
3366
@subheading Local Labels
3367
 
3368
@cindex local labels
3369
@cindex temporary symbol names
3370
@cindex symbol names, temporary
3371
Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3372
They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3373
the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3374
To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3375
represents any positive integer).  To refer to the most recent previous
3376
definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3377
you defined the label.  To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3378
@samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3379
for ``forwards''.
3380
 
3381
There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3382
too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3383
the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3384
defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3385
definition of a specific local label for a forward reference.  It is also worth
3386
noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3387
implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3388
 
3389
Here is an example:
3390
 
3391
@smallexample
3392
1:        branch 1f
3393
2:        branch 1b
3394
1:        branch 2f
3395
2:        branch 1b
3396
@end smallexample
3397
 
3398
Which is the equivalent of:
3399
 
3400
@smallexample
3401
label_1:  branch label_3
3402
label_2:  branch label_1
3403
label_3:  branch label_4
3404
label_4:  branch label_3
3405
@end smallexample
3406
 
3407
Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
3408
transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3409
The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3410
are optionally emitted to the object file.  The names are constructed using
3411
these parts:
3412
 
3413
@table @code
3414
@item @emph{local label prefix}
3415
All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3416
Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3417
that start with the local label prefix.  These labels are
3418
used for symbols you are never intended to see.  If you use the
3419
@samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3420
object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3421
you may use them in debugging.
3422
 
3423
@item @var{number}
3424
This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So if the
3425
label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3426
 
3427
@item @kbd{C-B}
3428
This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3429
of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3430
 
3431
@item @emph{ordinal number}
3432
This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first definition of
3433
@samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}.  The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3434
number @samp{15}, and so on.  Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3435
the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3436
@end table
3437
 
3438
So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3439
the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3440
 
3441
@subheading Dollar Local Labels
3442
@cindex dollar local symbols
3443
 
3444
@code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3445
dollar labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3446
soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain valid for only a small
3447
region of the input source code.  Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3448
scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3449
the same local label.
3450
 
3451
Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3452
except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3453
@samp{@b{55$:}}.
3454
 
3455
They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3456
names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3457
to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example, the fifth definition of
3458
@samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3459
 
3460
@node Dot
3461
@section The Special Dot Symbol
3462
 
3463
@cindex dot (symbol)
3464
@cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3465
@cindex current address
3466
@cindex location counter
3467
The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3468
@command{@value{AS}} is assembling into.  Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3469
.long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3470
Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3471
directive.
3472
@ifclear no-space-dir
3473
Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3474
@samp{.space 4}.
3475
@end ifclear
3476
 
3477
@node Symbol Attributes
3478
@section Symbol Attributes
3479
 
3480
@cindex symbol attributes
3481
@cindex attributes, symbol
3482
Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3483
``Type''.  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3484
attributes.
3485
@ifset INTERNALS
3486
The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3487
@end ifset
3488
 
3489
If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3490
all these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the
3491
symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3492
would want.
3493
 
3494
@menu
3495
* Symbol Value::                Value
3496
* Symbol Type::                 Type
3497
@ifset aout-bout
3498
@ifset GENERIC
3499
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3500
@end ifset
3501
@ifclear GENERIC
3502
@ifclear BOUT
3503
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3504
@end ifclear
3505
@ifset BOUT
3506
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3507
@end ifset
3508
@end ifclear
3509
@end ifset
3510
@ifset COFF
3511
* COFF Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for COFF
3512
@end ifset
3513
@ifset SOM
3514
* SOM Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for SOM
3515
@end ifset
3516
@end menu
3517
 
3518
@node Symbol Value
3519
@subsection Value
3520
 
3521
@cindex value of a symbol
3522
@cindex symbol value
3523
The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
3524
location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3525
number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3526
Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3527
as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
3528
symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3529
called absolute.
3530
 
3531
The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it is
3532
 
3533
@code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3534
same program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3535
name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3536
common declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3537
bytes (addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the
3538
allocated storage.
3539
 
3540
@node Symbol Type
3541
@subsection Type
3542
 
3543
@cindex type of a symbol
3544
@cindex symbol type
3545
The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3546
information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3547
(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
3548
format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3549
 
3550
@ifset aout-bout
3551
@ifclear GENERIC
3552
@ifset BOUT
3553
@c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title.  @group would be
3554
@c better if it were available outside examples.
3555
@need 1000
3556
@node a.out Symbols
3557
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3558
 
3559
@cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3560
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3561
These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3562
one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3563
@code{b.out}.
3564
 
3565
@end ifset
3566
@ifclear BOUT
3567
@node a.out Symbols
3568
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3569
 
3570
@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3571
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3572
 
3573
@end ifclear
3574
@end ifclear
3575
@ifset GENERIC
3576
@node a.out Symbols
3577
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3578
 
3579
@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3580
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3581
 
3582
@end ifset
3583
@menu
3584
* Symbol Desc::                 Descriptor
3585
* Symbol Other::                Other
3586
@end menu
3587
 
3588
@node Symbol Desc
3589
@subsubsection Descriptor
3590
 
3591
@cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3592
This is an arbitrary 16-bit value.  You may establish a symbol's
3593
descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3594
(@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}).  A descriptor value means nothing to
3595
@command{@value{AS}}.
3596
 
3597
@node Symbol Other
3598
@subsubsection Other
3599
 
3600
@cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3601
This is an arbitrary 8-bit value.  It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3602
@end ifset
3603
 
3604
@ifset COFF
3605
@node COFF Symbols
3606
@subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3607
 
3608
@cindex COFF symbol attributes
3609
@cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3610
 
3611
The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3612
like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3613
@code{.endef} directives.
3614
 
3615
@subsubsection Primary Attributes
3616
 
3617
@cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3618
The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3619
respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3620
 
3621
@subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3622
 
3623
@cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3624
The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3625
@code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3626
table information for COFF.
3627
@end ifset
3628
 
3629
@ifset SOM
3630
@node SOM Symbols
3631
@subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3632
 
3633
@cindex SOM symbol attributes
3634
@cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3635
 
3636
The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3637
the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3638
 
3639
The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3640
Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3641
@code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3642
@end ifset
3643
 
3644
@node Expressions
3645
@chapter Expressions
3646
 
3647
@cindex expressions
3648
@cindex addresses
3649
@cindex numeric values
3650
An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3651
Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3652
 
3653
The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3654
a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3655
enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3656
section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3657
the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3658
@command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3659
 
3660
@menu
3661
* Empty Exprs::                 Empty Expressions
3662
* Integer Exprs::               Integer Expressions
3663
@end menu
3664
 
3665
@node Empty Exprs
3666
@section Empty Expressions
3667
 
3668
@cindex empty expressions
3669
@cindex expressions, empty
3670
An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3671
Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3672
expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This
3673
is compatible with other assemblers.
3674
 
3675
@node Integer Exprs
3676
@section Integer Expressions
3677
 
3678
@cindex integer expressions
3679
@cindex expressions, integer
3680
An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3681
by @emph{operators}.
3682
 
3683
@menu
3684
* Arguments::                   Arguments
3685
* Operators::                   Operators
3686
* Prefix Ops::                  Prefix Operators
3687
* Infix Ops::                   Infix Operators
3688
@end menu
3689
 
3690
@node Arguments
3691
@subsection Arguments
3692
 
3693
@cindex expression arguments
3694
@cindex arguments in expressions
3695
@cindex operands in expressions
3696
@cindex arithmetic operands
3697
@dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other
3698
contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''.  In
3699
this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3700
the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3701
expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3702
instruction operands.
3703
 
3704
Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3705
@var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3706
or undefined.  @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3707
integer.
3708
 
3709
Numbers are usually integers.
3710
 
3711
A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
3712
that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3713
these 32 bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating
3714
instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3715
assemblers.
3716
 
3717
@cindex subexpressions
3718
Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3719
expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3720
operator followed by an argument.
3721
 
3722
@node Operators
3723
@subsection Operators
3724
 
3725
@cindex operators, in expressions
3726
@cindex arithmetic functions
3727
@cindex functions, in expressions
3728
@dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}.  Prefix
3729
operators are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear
3730
between their arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3731
whitespace.
3732
 
3733
@node Prefix Ops
3734
@subsection Prefix Operator
3735
 
3736
@cindex prefix operators
3737
@command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}.  They each take
3738
one argument, which must be absolute.
3739
 
3740
@c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3741
@c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3742
@c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3743
@tex
3744
\global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3745
@end tex
3746
 
3747
@table @code
3748
@item -
3749
@dfn{Negation}.  Two's complement negation.
3750
@item ~
3751
@dfn{Complementation}.  Bitwise not.
3752
@end table
3753
 
3754
@tex
3755
\global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3756
@end tex
3757
 
3758
@node Infix Ops
3759
@subsection Infix Operators
3760
 
3761
@cindex infix operators
3762
@cindex operators, permitted arguments
3763
@dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
3764
have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3765
to right.  Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3766
absolute, and the result is absolute.
3767
 
3768
@enumerate
3769
@cindex operator precedence
3770
@cindex precedence of operators
3771
 
3772
@item
3773
Highest Precedence
3774
 
3775
@table @code
3776
@item *
3777
@dfn{Multiplication}.
3778
 
3779
@item /
3780
@dfn{Division}.  Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3781
 
3782
@item %
3783
@dfn{Remainder}.
3784
 
3785
@item <<
3786
@dfn{Shift Left}.  Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3787
 
3788
@item >>
3789
@dfn{Shift Right}.  Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3790
@end table
3791
 
3792
@item
3793
Intermediate precedence
3794
 
3795
@table @code
3796
@item |
3797
 
3798
@dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3799
 
3800
@item &
3801
@dfn{Bitwise And}.
3802
 
3803
@item ^
3804
@dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3805
 
3806
@item !
3807
@dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3808
@end table
3809
 
3810
@item
3811
Low Precedence
3812
 
3813
@table @code
3814
@cindex addition, permitted arguments
3815
@cindex plus, permitted arguments
3816
@cindex arguments for addition
3817
@item +
3818
@dfn{Addition}.  If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
3819
the other argument.  You may not add together arguments from different
3820
sections.
3821
 
3822
@cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
3823
@cindex minus, permitted arguments
3824
@cindex arguments for subtraction
3825
@item -
3826
@dfn{Subtraction}.  If the right argument is absolute, the
3827
result has the section of the left argument.
3828
If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
3829
You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
3830
@c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
3831
 
3832
@cindex comparison expressions
3833
@cindex expressions, comparison
3834
@item  ==
3835
@dfn{Is Equal To}
3836
@item <>
3837
@itemx !=
3838
@dfn{Is Not Equal To}
3839
@item <
3840
@dfn{Is Less Than}
3841
@item >
3842
@dfn{Is Greater Than}
3843
@item >=
3844
@dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
3845
@item <=
3846
@dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
3847
 
3848
The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A true results has a
3849
value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0.   Note, these operators
3850
perform signed comparisons.
3851
@end table
3852
 
3853
@item Lowest Precedence
3854
 
3855
@table @code
3856
@item &&
3857
@dfn{Logical And}.
3858
 
3859
@item ||
3860
@dfn{Logical Or}.
3861
 
3862
These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
3863
expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
3864
value of 1 but a false results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical
3865
or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
3866
 
3867
@end table
3868
@end enumerate
3869
 
3870
In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
3871
address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
3872
 
3873
@node Pseudo Ops
3874
@chapter Assembler Directives
3875
 
3876
@cindex directives, machine independent
3877
@cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
3878
@cindex machine independent directives
3879
All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
3880
The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
3881
 
3882
This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
3883
target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
3884
@ifset GENERIC
3885
Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
3886
@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
3887
@end ifset
3888
@ifclear GENERIC
3889
@ifset machine-directives
3890
@xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
3891
@end ifset
3892
@end ifclear
3893
 
3894
@menu
3895
* Abort::                       @code{.abort}
3896
@ifset COFF
3897
* ABORT (COFF)::                @code{.ABORT}
3898
@end ifset
3899
 
3900
* Align::                       @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3901
* Altmacro::                    @code{.altmacro}
3902
* Ascii::                       @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3903
* Asciz::                       @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3904
* Balign::                      @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3905
* Byte::                        @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
3906
* CFI directives::              @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
3907
* Comm::                        @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
3908
* Data::                        @code{.data @var{subsection}}
3909
@ifset COFF
3910
* Def::                         @code{.def @var{name}}
3911
@end ifset
3912
@ifset aout-bout
3913
* Desc::                        @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
3914
@end ifset
3915
@ifset COFF
3916
* Dim::                         @code{.dim}
3917
@end ifset
3918
 
3919
* Double::                      @code{.double @var{flonums}}
3920
* Eject::                       @code{.eject}
3921
* Else::                        @code{.else}
3922
* Elseif::                      @code{.elseif}
3923
* End::                         @code{.end}
3924
@ifset COFF
3925
* Endef::                       @code{.endef}
3926
@end ifset
3927
 
3928
* Endfunc::                     @code{.endfunc}
3929
* Endif::                       @code{.endif}
3930
* Equ::                         @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3931
* Equiv::                       @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3932
* Eqv::                         @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3933
* Err::                         @code{.err}
3934
* Error::                       @code{.error @var{string}}
3935
* Exitm::                       @code{.exitm}
3936
* Extern::                      @code{.extern}
3937
* Fail::                        @code{.fail}
3938
* File::                        @code{.file}
3939
* Fill::                        @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
3940
* Float::                       @code{.float @var{flonums}}
3941
* Func::                        @code{.func}
3942
* Global::                      @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
3943
@ifset ELF
3944
* Gnu_attribute::               @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
3945
* Hidden::                      @code{.hidden @var{names}}
3946
@end ifset
3947
 
3948
* hword::                       @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
3949
* Ident::                       @code{.ident}
3950
* If::                          @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
3951
* Incbin::                      @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
3952
* Include::                     @code{.include "@var{file}"}
3953
* Int::                         @code{.int @var{expressions}}
3954
@ifset ELF
3955
* Internal::                    @code{.internal @var{names}}
3956
@end ifset
3957
 
3958
* Irp::                         @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
3959
* Irpc::                        @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
3960
* Lcomm::                       @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
3961
* Lflags::                      @code{.lflags}
3962
@ifclear no-line-dir
3963
* Line::                        @code{.line @var{line-number}}
3964
@end ifclear
3965
 
3966
* Linkonce::                    @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
3967
* List::                        @code{.list}
3968
* Ln::                          @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
3969
* Loc::                         @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
3970
* Loc_mark_labels::             @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
3971
@ifset ELF
3972
* Local::                       @code{.local @var{names}}
3973
@end ifset
3974
 
3975
* Long::                        @code{.long @var{expressions}}
3976
@ignore
3977
* Lsym::                        @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3978
@end ignore
3979
 
3980
* Macro::                       @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
3981
* MRI::                         @code{.mri @var{val}}
3982
* Noaltmacro::                  @code{.noaltmacro}
3983
* Nolist::                      @code{.nolist}
3984
* Octa::                        @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
3985
* Org::                         @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
3986
* P2align::                     @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
3987
@ifset ELF
3988
* PopSection::                  @code{.popsection}
3989
* Previous::                    @code{.previous}
3990
@end ifset
3991
 
3992
* Print::                       @code{.print @var{string}}
3993
@ifset ELF
3994
* Protected::                   @code{.protected @var{names}}
3995
@end ifset
3996
 
3997
* Psize::                       @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
3998
* Purgem::                      @code{.purgem @var{name}}
3999
@ifset ELF
4000
* PushSection::                 @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4001
@end ifset
4002
 
4003
* Quad::                        @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4004
* Reloc::                       @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4005
* Rept::                        @code{.rept @var{count}}
4006
* Sbttl::                       @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4007
@ifset COFF
4008
* Scl::                         @code{.scl @var{class}}
4009
@end ifset
4010
@ifset COFF-ELF
4011
* Section::                     @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4012
@end ifset
4013
 
4014
* Set::                         @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4015
* Short::                       @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4016
* Single::                      @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4017
@ifset COFF-ELF
4018
* Size::                        @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4019
@end ifset
4020
@ifclear no-space-dir
4021
* Skip::                        @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4022
@end ifclear
4023
 
4024
* Sleb128::                     @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4025
@ifclear no-space-dir
4026
* Space::                       @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4027
@end ifclear
4028
@ifset have-stabs
4029
* Stab::                        @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4030
@end ifset
4031
 
4032
* String::                      @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4033
* Struct::                      @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4034
@ifset ELF
4035
* SubSection::                  @code{.subsection}
4036
* Symver::                      @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4037
@end ifset
4038
 
4039
@ifset COFF
4040
* Tag::                         @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4041
@end ifset
4042
 
4043
* Text::                        @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4044
* Title::                       @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4045
@ifset COFF-ELF
4046
* Type::                        @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4047
@end ifset
4048
 
4049
* Uleb128::                     @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4050
@ifset COFF
4051
* Val::                         @code{.val @var{addr}}
4052
@end ifset
4053
 
4054
@ifset ELF
4055
* Version::                     @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4056
* VTableEntry::                 @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4057
* VTableInherit::               @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4058
@end ifset
4059
 
4060
* Warning::                     @code{.warning @var{string}}
4061
* Weak::                        @code{.weak @var{names}}
4062
* Weakref::                     @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4063
* Word::                        @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4064
* Deprecated::                  Deprecated Directives
4065
@end menu
4066
 
4067
@node Abort
4068
@section @code{.abort}
4069
 
4070
@cindex @code{abort} directive
4071
@cindex stopping the assembly
4072
This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for
4073
compatibility with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the
4074
assembly language source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender
4075
of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4076
quit also.  One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4077
 
4078
@ifset COFF
4079
@node ABORT (COFF)
4080
@section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4081
 
4082
@cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4083
When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4084
synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4085
 
4086
@ifset BOUT
4087
When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4088
but ignores it.
4089
@end ifset
4090
@end ifset
4091
 
4092
@node Align
4093
@section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4094
 
4095
@cindex padding the location counter
4096
@cindex @code{align} directive
4097
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4098
boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4099
required, as described below.
4100
 
4101
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4102
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4103
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4104
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4105
with no-op instructions.
4106
 
4107
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4108
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4109
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4110
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4111
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4112
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4113
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4114
 
4115
The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4116
For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4117
s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4118
alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4119
the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4120
is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
4121
first expression is the alignment request in words.
4122
 
4123
For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4124
strongarm, it is the
4125
number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4126
advancement.  For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4127
counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
4128
multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4129
 
4130
This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4131
native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4132
GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4133
described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4134
architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4135
 
4136
@node Altmacro
4137
@section @code{.altmacro}
4138
Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4139
 
4140
@ftable @code
4141
@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4142
One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available.  It is used to
4143
generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4144
replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion.  The
4145
replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4146
separate macro expansion.  @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4147
define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4148
 
4149
@item String delimiters
4150
You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4151
@code{"@var{string}"}:
4152
 
4153
@table @code
4154
@item '@var{string}'
4155
You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4156
 
4157
@item <@var{string}>
4158
You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4159
@end table
4160
 
4161
@item single-character string escape
4162
To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4163
character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4164
character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark).  For example, you can
4165
write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4166
 
4167
@item Expression results as strings
4168
You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4169
and use the result as a string.
4170
@end ftable
4171
 
4172
@node Ascii
4173
@section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4174
 
4175
@cindex @code{ascii} directive
4176
@cindex string literals
4177
@code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4178
separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
4179
trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4180
 
4181
@node Asciz
4182
@section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4183
 
4184
@cindex @code{asciz} directive
4185
@cindex zero-terminated strings
4186
@cindex null-terminated strings
4187
@code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4188
a zero byte.  The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4189
 
4190
@node Balign
4191
@section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4192
 
4193
@cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4194
@cindex @code{balign} directive
4195
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4196
storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4197
alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4198
the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4199
is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4200
 
4201
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4202
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4203
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4204
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4205
with no-op instructions.
4206
 
4207
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4208
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4209
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4210
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4211
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4212
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4213
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4214
 
4215
@cindex @code{balignw} directive
4216
@cindex @code{balignl} directive
4217
The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4218
@code{.balign} directive.  The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4219
pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4220
fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.balignw
4221
4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
4222
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4223
the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4224
undefined.
4225
 
4226
@node Byte
4227
@section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4228
 
4229
@cindex @code{byte} directive
4230
@cindex integers, one byte
4231
@code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4232
Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4233
 
4234
@node CFI directives
4235
@section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4236
@cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4237
@code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4238
should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4239
If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4240
if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4241
To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}.  The default if this
4242
directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4243
 
4244
@section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4245
@cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4246
@code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4247
should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4248
data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4249
@code{.cfi_endproc}.
4250
 
4251
Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4252
it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4253
 
4254
@section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4255
@cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4256
@code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4257
unwind entry previously opened by
4258
@code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4259
 
4260
@section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4261
@code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4262
@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4263
should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4264
argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4265
a constant or a symbol name.  When using indirect encodings,
4266
the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4267
can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4268
The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4269
no personality routine.
4270
 
4271
@section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4272
@code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4273
@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4274
should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4275
argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4276
or a symbol name.  The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4277
no LSDA.
4278
 
4279
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4280
@code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4281
address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4282
 
4283
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4284
@code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4285
now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4286
remains the same.
4287
 
4288
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4289
@code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4290
remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4291
absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4292
CFA address.
4293
 
4294
@section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4295
Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4296
value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4297
 
4298
@section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4299
Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4300
CFA.
4301
 
4302
@section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4303
Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4304
the current CFA register.  This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4305
using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4306
This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4307
code it's annotating.
4308
 
4309
@section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4310
Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4311
 
4312
@section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4313
@code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4314
same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4315
instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4316
 
4317
@section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4318
From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4319
 
4320
@section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4321
Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4322
i.e. no restoration needed.
4323
 
4324
@section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4325
First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4326
then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4327
everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4328
the previous saved state.
4329
 
4330
@section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4331
Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4332
directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4333
 
4334
@section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4335
Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4336
 
4337
@section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4338
SPARC register window has been saved.
4339
 
4340
@section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4341
Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One
4342
might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4343
opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4344
 
4345
@section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4346
The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}.  The value of @var{label}
4347
will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4348
description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4349
 
4350
The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4351
limited to the return address register.  Here, it can be useful to
4352
mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4353
by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4354
or another register.
4355
 
4356
@node Comm
4357
@section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4358
 
4359
@cindex @code{comm} directive
4360
@cindex symbol, common
4361
@code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}.  When linking, a
4362
common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4363
of the same name in another object file.  If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4364
definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4365
allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory.  @var{length} must be an
4366
absolute expression.  If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4367
the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4368
using the largest size.
4369
 
4370
@ifset COFF-ELF
4371
When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4372
an optional third argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4373
specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4374
that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4375
as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4376
boundary).  The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4377
power of two.  If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4378
common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol.  If no
4379
alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4380
largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4381
maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4382
is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4383
@samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4384
multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4385
It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4386
(@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4387
@end ifset
4388
 
4389
@ifset HPPA
4390
The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
4391
@samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4392
@end ifset
4393
 
4394
@node Data
4395
@section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4396
 
4397
@cindex @code{data} directive
4398
@code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4399
end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4400
absolute expression).  If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4401
to zero.
4402
 
4403
@ifset COFF
4404
@node Def
4405
@section @code{.def @var{name}}
4406
 
4407
@cindex @code{def} directive
4408
@cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4409
@cindex debugging COFF symbols
4410
Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4411
definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4412
@ifset BOUT
4413
 
4414
This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4415
format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4416
but ignored.
4417
@end ifset
4418
@end ifset
4419
 
4420
@ifset aout-bout
4421
@node Desc
4422
@section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4423
 
4424
@cindex @code{desc} directive
4425
@cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4426
@cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4427
This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4428
to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4429
 
4430
@ifset COFF
4431
The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4432
configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4433
object format.  For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4434
it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4435
@end ifset
4436
@end ifset
4437
 
4438
@ifset COFF
4439
@node Dim
4440
@section @code{.dim}
4441
 
4442
@cindex @code{dim} directive
4443
@cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4444
@cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4445
This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4446
information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
4447
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4448
@ifset BOUT
4449
 
4450
@samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4451
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4452
ignores it.
4453
@end ifset
4454
@end ifset
4455
 
4456
@node Double
4457
@section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4458
 
4459
@cindex @code{double} directive
4460
@cindex floating point numbers (double)
4461
@code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
4462
assembles floating point numbers.
4463
@ifset GENERIC
4464
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4465
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4466
@end ifset
4467
@ifclear GENERIC
4468
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
4469
On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4470
in @sc{ieee} format.
4471
@end ifset
4472
@end ifclear
4473
 
4474
@node Eject
4475
@section @code{.eject}
4476
 
4477
@cindex @code{eject} directive
4478
@cindex new page, in listings
4479
@cindex page, in listings
4480
@cindex listing control: new page
4481
Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4482
 
4483
@node Else
4484
@section @code{.else}
4485
 
4486
@cindex @code{else} directive
4487
@code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4488
assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It marks the beginning of a section
4489
of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4490
was false.
4491
 
4492
@node Elseif
4493
@section @code{.elseif}
4494
 
4495
@cindex @code{elseif} directive
4496
@code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4497
assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It is shorthand for beginning a new
4498
@code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4499
 
4500
@node End
4501
@section @code{.end}
4502
 
4503
@cindex @code{end} directive
4504
@code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file.  @command{@value{AS}} does not
4505
process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4506
 
4507
@ifset COFF
4508
@node Endef
4509
@section @code{.endef}
4510
 
4511
@cindex @code{endef} directive
4512
This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4513
@code{.def}.
4514
@ifset BOUT
4515
 
4516
@samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4517
@command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4518
directive but ignores it.
4519
@end ifset
4520
@end ifset
4521
 
4522
@node Endfunc
4523
@section @code{.endfunc}
4524
@cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4525
@code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4526
 
4527
@node Endif
4528
@section @code{.endif}
4529
 
4530
@cindex @code{endif} directive
4531
@code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4532
it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4533
conditionally.  @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4534
 
4535
@node Equ
4536
@section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4537
 
4538
@cindex @code{equ} directive
4539
@cindex assigning values to symbols
4540
@cindex symbols, assigning values to
4541
This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4542
It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4543
 
4544
@ifset HPPA
4545
The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4546
@samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4547
@end ifset
4548
 
4549
@ifset Z80
4550
The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4551
@samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4552
On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4553
but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4554
Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4555
@end ifset
4556
 
4557
@node Equiv
4558
@section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4559
@cindex @code{equiv} directive
4560
The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4561
the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined.  Note a
4562
symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4563
undefined.
4564
 
4565
Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4566
@smallexample
4567
.ifdef SYM
4568
.err
4569
.endif
4570
.equ SYM,VAL
4571
@end smallexample
4572
plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4573
 
4574
@node Eqv
4575
@section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4576
@cindex @code{eqv} directive
4577
The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4578
evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each time
4579
the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4580
value is taken.
4581
 
4582
@node Err
4583
@section @code{.err}
4584
@cindex @code{err} directive
4585
If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4586
message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4587
object file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4588
 
4589
@node Error
4590
@section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4591
@cindex error directive
4592
 
4593
Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4594
string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't specify the
4595
message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4596
@xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4597
 
4598
@smallexample
4599
 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4600
@end smallexample
4601
 
4602
@node Exitm
4603
@section @code{.exitm}
4604
Exit early from the current macro definition.  @xref{Macro}.
4605
 
4606
@node Extern
4607
@section @code{.extern}
4608
 
4609
@cindex @code{extern} directive
4610
@code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4611
with other assemblers---but it is ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} treats
4612
all undefined symbols as external.
4613
 
4614
@node Fail
4615
@section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4616
 
4617
@cindex @code{fail} directive
4618
Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4619
or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message.  If the value is less
4620
than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message.  The message will
4621
include the value of @var{expression}.  This can occasionally be useful inside
4622
complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4623
 
4624
@node File
4625
@section @code{.file}
4626
@cindex @code{file} directive
4627
 
4628
@ifclear no-file-dir
4629
There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive.  Targets
4630
that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4631
@code{.file}.  Other targets use the default version.
4632
 
4633
@subheading Default Version
4634
 
4635
@cindex logical file name
4636
@cindex file name, logical
4637
This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4638
are about to start a new logical file.  The syntax is:
4639
 
4640
@smallexample
4641
.file @var{string}
4642
@end smallexample
4643
 
4644
@var{string} is the new file name.  In general, the filename is
4645
recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4646
to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}.  This
4647
statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4648
old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4649
 
4650
@subheading DWARF2 Version
4651
@end ifclear
4652
 
4653
When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4654
to the @code{.debug_line} file name table.  The syntax is:
4655
 
4656
@smallexample
4657
.file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4658
@end smallexample
4659
 
4660
The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4661
index of the entry in the table.  The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4662
literal.
4663
 
4664
The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4665
table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4666
information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4667
entries will have.
4668
 
4669
@node Fill
4670
@section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4671
 
4672
@cindex @code{fill} directive
4673
@cindex writing patterns in memory
4674
@cindex patterns, writing in memory
4675
@var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4676
This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes.  @var{Repeat}
4677
may be zero or more.  @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4678
more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4679
other people's assemblers.  The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4680
is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
4681
zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4682
byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4683
Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4684
@var{size} bytes of this number.  Again, this bizarre behavior is
4685
compatible with other people's assemblers.
4686
 
4687
@var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4688
If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4689
assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4690
@var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4691
 
4692
@node Float
4693
@section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4694
 
4695
@cindex floating point numbers (single)
4696
@cindex @code{float} directive
4697
This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
4698
has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4699
@ifset GENERIC
4700
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4701
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4702
@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4703
@end ifset
4704
@ifclear GENERIC
4705
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
4706
On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4707
in @sc{ieee} format.
4708
@end ifset
4709
@end ifclear
4710
 
4711
@node Func
4712
@section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4713
@cindex @code{func} directive
4714
@code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4715
is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4716
Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4717
@var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4718
prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4719
@samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4720
All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4721
The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4722
 
4723
@node Global
4724
@section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4725
 
4726
@cindex @code{global} directive
4727
@cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4728
@code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}.  If you define
4729
@var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4730
other partial programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise,
4731
@var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4732
from another file linked into the same program.
4733
 
4734
Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4735
compatibility with other assemblers.
4736
 
4737
@ifset HPPA
4738
On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4739
partial programs.  You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4740
@xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4741
@end ifset
4742
 
4743
@ifset ELF
4744
@node Gnu_attribute
4745
@section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4746
Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file.  @xref{Object Attributes}.
4747
 
4748
@node Hidden
4749
@section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4750
 
4751
@cindex @code{hidden} directive
4752
@cindex visibility
4753
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
4754
@code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4755
@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4756
 
4757
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4758
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
4759
@code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
4760
Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
4761
@end ifset
4762
 
4763
@node hword
4764
@section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4765
 
4766
@cindex @code{hword} directive
4767
@cindex integers, 16-bit
4768
@cindex numbers, 16-bit
4769
@cindex sixteen bit integers
4770
This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
4771
a 16 bit number for each.
4772
 
4773
@ifset GENERIC
4774
This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
4775
architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
4776
@end ifset
4777
@ifclear GENERIC
4778
@ifset W32
4779
This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
4780
@end ifset
4781
@ifset W16
4782
This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
4783
@end ifset
4784
@end ifclear
4785
 
4786
@node Ident
4787
@section @code{.ident}
4788
 
4789
@cindex @code{ident} directive
4790
 
4791
This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.  The
4792
behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When using the
4793
a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
4794
source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
4795
for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
4796
@code{.rdata} section, depending on the target.  When using ELF, comments are
4797
emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
4798
 
4799
@node If
4800
@section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4801
 
4802
@cindex conditional assembly
4803
@cindex @code{if} directive
4804
@code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
4805
considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
4806
(which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero.  The end of
4807
the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
4808
(@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
4809
alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
4810
If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
4811
nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
4812
 
4813
The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
4814
@table @code
4815
@cindex @code{ifdef} directive
4816
@item .ifdef @var{symbol}
4817
Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4818
has been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
4819
is considered to be undefined.
4820
 
4821
@cindex @code{ifb} directive
4822
@item .ifb @var{text}
4823
Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
4824
 
4825
@cindex @code{ifc} directive
4826
@item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
4827
Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same.  The
4828
strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If they are not quoted,
4829
the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
4830
end of the line.  Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted.  The
4831
string comparison is case sensitive.
4832
 
4833
@cindex @code{ifeq} directive
4834
@item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
4835
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
4836
 
4837
@cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
4838
@item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
4839
Another form of @code{.ifc}.  The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
4840
 
4841
@cindex @code{ifge} directive
4842
@item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
4843
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
4844
equal to zero.
4845
 
4846
@cindex @code{ifgt} directive
4847
@item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
4848
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
4849
 
4850
@cindex @code{ifle} directive
4851
@item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
4852
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
4853
to zero.
4854
 
4855
@cindex @code{iflt} directive
4856
@item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
4857
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
4858
 
4859
@cindex @code{ifnb} directive
4860
@item .ifnb @var{text}
4861
Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4862
following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
4863
 
4864
@cindex @code{ifnc} directive
4865
@item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
4866
Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4867
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4868
 
4869
@cindex @code{ifndef} directive
4870
@cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
4871
@item .ifndef @var{symbol}
4872
@itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
4873
Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4874
has not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a symbol
4875
which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
4876
 
4877
@cindex @code{ifne} directive
4878
@item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
4879
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
4880
(in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
4881
 
4882
@cindex @code{ifnes} directive
4883
@item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
4884
Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4885
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4886
@end table
4887
 
4888
@node Incbin
4889
@section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4890
 
4891
@cindex @code{incbin} directive
4892
@cindex binary files, including
4893
The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
4894
location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
4895
option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
4896
around @var{file}.
4897
 
4898
The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
4899
@var{file}.  The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
4900
read.  Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
4901
responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
4902
after the @code{incbin} directive.
4903
 
4904
@node Include
4905
@section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4906
 
4907
@cindex @code{include} directive
4908
@cindex supporting files, including
4909
@cindex files, including
4910
This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
4911
points in your source program.  The code from @var{file} is assembled as
4912
if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
4913
included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You
4914
can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
4915
(@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
4916
around @var{file}.
4917
 
4918
@node Int
4919
@section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4920
 
4921
@cindex @code{int} directive
4922
@cindex integers, 32-bit
4923
Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
4924
For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
4925
expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
4926
of target the assembly is for.
4927
 
4928
@ifclear GENERIC
4929
@ifset H8
4930
On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
4931
integers.  On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
4932
32-bit integers.
4933
@end ifset
4934
@end ifclear
4935
 
4936
@ifset ELF
4937
@node Internal
4938
@section @code{.internal @var{names}}
4939
 
4940
@cindex @code{internal} directive
4941
@cindex visibility
4942
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
4943
@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
4944
@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4945
 
4946
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4947
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
4948
@code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
4949
(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
4950
processing must also be performed upon the  symbols as well.
4951
@end ifset
4952
 
4953
@node Irp
4954
@section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4955
 
4956
@cindex @code{irp} directive
4957
Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
4958
The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
4959
terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
4960
set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no
4961
@var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
4962
@var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to @var{symbol} within the
4963
sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
4964
 
4965
For example, assembling
4966
 
4967
@example
4968
        .irp    param,1,2,3
4969
        move    d\param,sp@@-
4970
        .endr
4971
@end example
4972
 
4973
is equivalent to assembling
4974
 
4975
@example
4976
        move    d1,sp@@-
4977
        move    d2,sp@@-
4978
        move    d3,sp@@-
4979
@end example
4980
 
4981
For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
4982
 
4983
@node Irpc
4984
@section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4985
 
4986
@cindex @code{irpc} directive
4987
Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
4988
The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
4989
terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each character in @var{value},
4990
@var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
4991
assembled.  If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
4992
assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to
4993
@var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
4994
 
4995
For example, assembling
4996
 
4997
@example
4998
        .irpc    param,123
4999
        move    d\param,sp@@-
5000
        .endr
5001
@end example
5002
 
5003
is equivalent to assembling
5004
 
5005
@example
5006
        move    d1,sp@@-
5007
        move    d2,sp@@-
5008
        move    d3,sp@@-
5009
@end example
5010
 
5011
For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5012
at @xref{Macro}.
5013
 
5014
@node Lcomm
5015
@section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5016
 
5017
@cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5018
@cindex local common symbols
5019
@cindex symbols, local common
5020
Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5021
denoted by @var{symbol}.  The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5022
those of the new local common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss
5023
section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  @var{Symbol}
5024
is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5025
not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5026
 
5027
@ifset GENERIC
5028
Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}.  This
5029
argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5030
@end ifset
5031
 
5032
@ifset HPPA
5033
The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
5034
@samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5035
@end ifset
5036
 
5037
@node Lflags
5038
@section @code{.lflags}
5039
 
5040
@cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5041
@command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5042
assemblers, but ignores it.
5043
 
5044
@ifclear no-line-dir
5045
@node Line
5046
@section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5047
 
5048
@cindex @code{line} directive
5049
@cindex logical line number
5050
@ifset aout-bout
5051
Change the logical line number.  @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5052
expression.  The next line has that logical line number.  Therefore any other
5053
statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5054
reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.  One day
5055
@command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5056
for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5057
@end ifset
5058
 
5059
Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5060
@code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5061
when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5062
were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5063
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5064
 
5065
Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5066
used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5067
debugging.
5068
@end ifclear
5069
 
5070
@node Linkonce
5071
@section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5072
@cindex COMDAT
5073
@cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5074
@cindex common sections
5075
Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5076
This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5077
but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5078
The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5079
Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5080
unique.
5081
 
5082
This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5083
writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5084
Executable format used on Windows NT.
5085
 
5086
The @var{type} argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
5087
following strings.  For example:
5088
@smallexample
5089
.linkonce same_size
5090
@end smallexample
5091
Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5092
 
5093
@table @code
5094
@item discard
5095
Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
5096
 
5097
@item one_only
5098
Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5099
 
5100
@item same_size
5101
Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5102
 
5103
@item same_contents
5104
Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5105
@end table
5106
 
5107
@node List
5108
@section @code{.list}
5109
 
5110
@cindex @code{list} directive
5111
@cindex listing control, turning on
5112
Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5113
not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5114
internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5115
counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5116
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5117
 
5118
By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
5119
@samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5120
the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5121
 
5122
@node Ln
5123
@section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5124
 
5125
@cindex @code{ln} directive
5126
@ifclear no-line-dir
5127
@samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5128
@end ifclear
5129
@ifset no-line-dir
5130
Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number.  @var{line-number}
5131
must be an absolute expression.  The next line has that logical
5132
line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5133
statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5134
line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5135
@ifset BOUT
5136
 
5137
This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5138
configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5139
output format.
5140
@end ifset
5141
@end ifset
5142
 
5143
@node Loc
5144
@section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5145
@cindex @code{loc} directive
5146
When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5147
the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5148
number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5149
instruction.  The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5150
arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5151
the row is added.
5152
 
5153
The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5154
 
5155
@table @code
5156
@item basic_block
5157
This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5158
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5159
 
5160
@item prologue_end
5161
This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5162
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5163
 
5164
@item epilogue_begin
5165
This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5166
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5167
 
5168
@item is_stmt @var{value}
5169
This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5170
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5171
either 0 or 1.
5172
 
5173
@item isa @var{value}
5174
This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5175
state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5176
 
5177
@item discriminator @var{value}
5178
This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5179
state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5180
 
5181
@end table
5182
 
5183
@node Loc_mark_labels
5184
@section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5185
@cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5186
When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5187
the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5188
to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5189
register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5190
The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5191
this function respectively.
5192
 
5193
@ifset ELF
5194
@node Local
5195
@section @code{.local @var{names}}
5196
 
5197
@cindex @code{local} directive
5198
This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5199
the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5200
will not be externally visible.  If the symbols do not already exist,
5201
they will be created.
5202
 
5203
For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5204
accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5205
the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5206
(@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5207
@end ifset
5208
 
5209
@node Long
5210
@section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5211
 
5212
@cindex @code{long} directive
5213
@code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}.  @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5214
 
5215
@ignore
5216
@c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5217
@c what it really ought to do
5218
@node Lsym
5219
@section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5220
 
5221
@cindex @code{lsym} directive
5222
@cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5223
@code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5224
the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5225
rest of the assembly.  This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5226
the same as the expression value:
5227
@smallexample
5228
@var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5229
@var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5230
@var{value} = @var{expression}
5231
@end smallexample
5232
@noindent
5233
The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5234
@end ignore
5235
 
5236
@node Macro
5237
@section @code{.macro}
5238
 
5239
@cindex macros
5240
The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5241
generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a macro
5242
@code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5243
 
5244
@example
5245
        .macro  sum from=0, to=5
5246
        .long   \from
5247
        .if     \to-\from
5248
        sum     "(\from+1)",\to
5249
        .endif
5250
        .endm
5251
@end example
5252
 
5253
@noindent
5254
With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5255
 
5256
@example
5257
        .long   0
5258
        .long   1
5259
        .long   2
5260
        .long   3
5261
        .long   4
5262
        .long   5
5263
@end example
5264
 
5265
@ftable @code
5266
@item .macro @var{macname}
5267
@itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5268
@cindex @code{macro} directive
5269
Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}.  If your macro
5270
definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5271
separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro argument to
5272
indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5273
@samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5274
(through @samp{:@code{vararg}}).  You can supply a default value for any
5275
macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}.  You
5276
cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5277
subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5278
definitions.  For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5279
 
5280
@table @code
5281
@item .macro comm
5282
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5283
arguments.
5284
 
5285
@item  .macro plus1 p, p1
5286
@itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5287
Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5288
which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5289
@samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5290
 
5291
@item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5292
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5293
arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5294
After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5295
@samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5296
@var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5297
,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5298
@samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5299
 
5300
@item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5301
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5302
arguments.  The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5303
not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5304
will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5305
 
5306
When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5307
position, or by keyword.  For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5308
@samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5309
 
5310
@end table
5311
 
5312
Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5313
as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5314
occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5315
characters when they occur in a special position.  For example, if the colon
5316
(@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5317
architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5318
character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5319
replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5320
construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5321
identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution.  So for example
5322
this macro definition:
5323
 
5324
@example
5325
        .macro label l
5326
\l:
5327
        .endm
5328
@end example
5329
 
5330
might not work as expected.  Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5331
called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5332
assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5333
identifier.
5334
 
5335
Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5336
which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names).  So
5337
for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5338
length specifier like this:
5339
 
5340
@example
5341
        .macro opcode base length
5342
        \base.\length
5343
        .endm
5344
@end example
5345
 
5346
and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5347
instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5348
interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5349
 
5350
There are several possible ways around this problem:
5351
 
5352
@table @code
5353
@item Insert white space
5354
If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5355
solution.  eg:
5356
 
5357
@example
5358
        .macro label l
5359
\l :
5360
        .endm
5361
@end example
5362
 
5363
@item Use @samp{\()}
5364
The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5365
the following text.  eg:
5366
 
5367
@example
5368
        .macro opcode base length
5369
        \base\().\length
5370
        .endm
5371
@end example
5372
 
5373
@item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5374
In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5375
used as a separator.  eg:
5376
 
5377
@example
5378
        .altmacro
5379
        .macro label l
5380
l&:
5381
        .endm
5382
@end example
5383
@end table
5384
 
5385
Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5386
also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5387
and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5388
 
5389
@item .endm
5390
@cindex @code{endm} directive
5391
Mark the end of a macro definition.
5392
 
5393
@item .exitm
5394
@cindex @code{exitm} directive
5395
Exit early from the current macro definition.
5396
 
5397
@cindex number of macros executed
5398
@cindex macros, count executed
5399
@item \@@
5400
@command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5401
executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5402
output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5403
 
5404
@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5405
@emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5406
macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5407
@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5408
@end ftable
5409
 
5410
@node MRI
5411
@section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5412
 
5413
@cindex @code{mri} directive
5414
@cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5415
If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode.  If
5416
@var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode.  This change
5417
affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5418
of the file.  @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5419
 
5420
@node Noaltmacro
5421
@section @code{.noaltmacro}
5422
Disable alternate macro mode.  @xref{Altmacro}.
5423
 
5424
@node Nolist
5425
@section @code{.nolist}
5426
 
5427
@cindex @code{nolist} directive
5428
@cindex listing control, turning off
5429
Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5430
not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5431
internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5432
counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5433
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5434
 
5435
@node Octa
5436
@section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5437
 
5438
@c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others?  Or warn?
5439
@cindex @code{octa} directive
5440
@cindex integer, 16-byte
5441
@cindex sixteen byte integer
5442
This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
5443
bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5444
 
5445
The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5446
hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5447
 
5448
@node Org
5449
@section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5450
 
5451
@cindex @code{org} directive
5452
@cindex location counter, advancing
5453
@cindex advancing location counter
5454
@cindex current address, advancing
5455
Advance the location counter of the current section to
5456
@var{new-lc}.  @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5457
expression with the same section as the current subsection.  That is,
5458
you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5459
wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored.  To be compatible
5460
with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5461
@command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5462
is the same as the current subsection.
5463
 
5464
@code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5465
unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5466
backwards.
5467
 
5468
@c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5469
@c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5470
@c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5471
Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5472
may not be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5473
a chance to share your improved assembler.
5474
 
5475
Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5476
to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other
5477
people's assemblers.
5478
 
5479
When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5480
intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5481
absolute expression.  If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5482
@var{fill} defaults to zero.
5483
 
5484
@node P2align
5485
@section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5486
 
5487
@cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5488
@cindex @code{p2align} directive
5489
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5490
storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5491
number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5492
advancement.  For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5493
counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
5494
multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5495
 
5496
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5497
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
5498
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
5499
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5500
with no-op instructions.
5501
 
5502
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
5503
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5504
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5505
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
5506
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5507
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5508
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5509
 
5510
@cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5511
@cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5512
The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5513
@code{.p2align} directive.  The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5514
pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5515
fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.p2alignw
5516
2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
5517
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5518
the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5519
undefined.
5520
 
5521
@ifset ELF
5522
@node PopSection
5523
@section @code{.popsection}
5524
 
5525
@cindex @code{popsection} directive
5526
@cindex Section Stack
5527
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5528
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5529
@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5530
(@pxref{Previous}).
5531
 
5532
This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5533
section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is popped off the
5534
stack.
5535
@end ifset
5536
 
5537
@ifset ELF
5538
@node Previous
5539
@section @code{.previous}
5540
 
5541
@cindex @code{previous} directive
5542
@cindex Section Stack
5543
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5544
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5545
@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5546
(@pxref{PopSection}).
5547
 
5548
This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5549
referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one.  Multiple
5550
@code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5551
subsections).  For example:
5552
 
5553
@smallexample
5554
.section A
5555
 .subsection 1
5556
  .word 0x1234
5557
 .subsection 2
5558
  .word 0x5678
5559
.previous
5560
 .word 0x9abc
5561
@end smallexample
5562
 
5563
Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5564
section A.  Whilst:
5565
 
5566
@smallexample
5567
.section A
5568
.subsection 1
5569
  # Now in section A subsection 1
5570
  .word 0x1234
5571
.section B
5572
.subsection 0
5573
  # Now in section B subsection 0
5574
  .word 0x5678
5575
.subsection 1
5576
  # Now in section B subsection 1
5577
  .word 0x9abc
5578
.previous
5579
  # Now in section B subsection 0
5580
  .word 0xdef0
5581
@end smallexample
5582
 
5583
Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5584
section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5585
 
5586
In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5587
the top section on the section stack.
5588
@end ifset
5589
 
5590
@node Print
5591
@section @code{.print @var{string}}
5592
 
5593
@cindex @code{print} directive
5594
@command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5595
assembly.  You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5596
 
5597
@ifset ELF
5598
@node Protected
5599
@section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5600
 
5601
@cindex @code{protected} directive
5602
@cindex visibility
5603
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
5604
@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5605
 
5606
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5607
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
5608
@code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5609
components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5610
component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5611
this.
5612
@end ifset
5613
 
5614
@node Psize
5615
@section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5616
 
5617
@cindex @code{psize} directive
5618
@cindex listing control: paper size
5619
@cindex paper size, for listings
5620
Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5621
number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5622
 
5623
If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5624
of 60.  You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5625
default width is 200 columns.
5626
 
5627
@command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5628
lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5629
@code{.eject}).
5630
 
5631
If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5632
those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5633
 
5634
@node Purgem
5635
@section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5636
 
5637
@cindex @code{purgem} directive
5638
Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5639
expanded.  @xref{Macro}.
5640
 
5641
@ifset ELF
5642
@node PushSection
5643
@section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5644
 
5645
@cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5646
@cindex Section Stack
5647
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5648
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5649
@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5650
(@pxref{Previous}).
5651
 
5652
This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5653
top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5654
subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5655
@code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5656
as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5657
@end ifset
5658
 
5659
@node Quad
5660
@section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5661
 
5662
@cindex @code{quad} directive
5663
@code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
5664
each bignum, it emits
5665
@ifclear bignum-16
5666
an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5667
warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5668
@cindex eight-byte integer
5669
@cindex integer, 8-byte
5670
 
5671
The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5672
hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5673
@end ifclear
5674
@ifset bignum-16
5675
a 16-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5676
warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5677
@cindex sixteen-byte integer
5678
@cindex integer, 16-byte
5679
@end ifset
5680
 
5681
@node Reloc
5682
@section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5683
 
5684
@cindex @code{reloc} directive
5685
Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5686
@var{expression}.  If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5687
the current section.  If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5688
symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5689
@var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5690
absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g. ELF REL
5691
targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5692
relocation.  This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5693
section.
5694
 
5695
@node Rept
5696
@section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5697
 
5698
@cindex @code{rept} directive
5699
Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5700
@code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5701
 
5702
For example, assembling
5703
 
5704
@example
5705
        .rept   3
5706
        .long   0
5707
        .endr
5708
@end example
5709
 
5710
is equivalent to assembling
5711
 
5712
@example
5713
        .long   0
5714
        .long   0
5715
        .long   0
5716
@end example
5717
 
5718
@node Sbttl
5719
@section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5720
 
5721
@cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5722
@cindex subtitles for listings
5723
@cindex listing control: subtitle
5724
Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5725
title line) when generating assembly listings.
5726
 
5727
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5728
it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5729
 
5730
@ifset COFF
5731
@node Scl
5732
@section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5733
 
5734
@cindex @code{scl} directive
5735
@cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5736
@cindex COFF symbol storage class
5737
Set the storage-class value for a symbol.  This directive may only be
5738
used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.  Storage class may flag
5739
whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5740
symbolic debugging information.
5741
@ifset BOUT
5742
 
5743
The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5744
configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5745
accepts this directive but ignores it.
5746
@end ifset
5747
@end ifset
5748
 
5749
@ifset COFF-ELF
5750
@node Section
5751
@section @code{.section @var{name}}
5752
 
5753
@cindex named section
5754
Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
5755
named @var{name}.
5756
 
5757
This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
5758
named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
5759
with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
5760
 
5761
@ifset COFF
5762
@ifset ELF
5763
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5764
@subheading COFF Version
5765
@end ifset
5766
 
5767
@cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
5768
For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
5769
ways:
5770
 
5771
@smallexample
5772
.section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
5773
.section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
5774
@end smallexample
5775
 
5776
If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
5777
section.  Each flag is a single character.  The following flags are recognized:
5778
@table @code
5779
@item b
5780
bss section (uninitialized data)
5781
@item n
5782
section is not loaded
5783
@item w
5784
writable section
5785
@item d
5786
data section
5787
@item r
5788
read-only section
5789
@item x
5790
executable section
5791
@item s
5792
shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
5793
@item a
5794
ignored.  (For compatibility with the ELF version)
5795
@item y
5796
section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
5797
@item 0-9
5798
single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
5799
@end table
5800
 
5801
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
5802
the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
5803
loaded and writable.  Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
5804
from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
5805
will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
5806
 
5807
If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
5808
taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
5809
@end ifset
5810
 
5811
@ifset ELF
5812
@ifset COFF
5813
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5814
@subheading ELF Version
5815
@end ifset
5816
 
5817
@cindex Section Stack
5818
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5819
@code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
5820
(@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
5821
@code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
5822
 
5823
@cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
5824
For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
5825
 
5826
@smallexample
5827
.section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
5828
@end smallexample
5829
 
5830
The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
5831
combination of the following characters:
5832
@table @code
5833
@item a
5834
section is allocatable
5835
@item e
5836
section is excluded from executable and shared library.
5837
@item w
5838
section is writable
5839
@item x
5840
section is executable
5841
@item M
5842
section is mergeable
5843
@item S
5844
section contains zero terminated strings
5845
@item G
5846
section is a member of a section group
5847
@item T
5848
section is used for thread-local-storage
5849
@item ?
5850
section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
5851
@end table
5852
 
5853
The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
5854
@table @code
5855
@item @@progbits
5856
section contains data
5857
@item @@nobits
5858
section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
5859
@item @@note
5860
section contains data which is used by things other than the program
5861
@item @@init_array
5862
section contains an array of pointers to init functions
5863
@item @@fini_array
5864
section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
5865
@item @@preinit_array
5866
section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
5867
@end table
5868
 
5869
Many targets only support the first three section types.
5870
 
5871
Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
5872
ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port uses the
5873
@code{%} character.
5874
 
5875
If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
5876
be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
5877
 
5878
@smallexample
5879
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
5880
@end smallexample
5881
 
5882
Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
5883
constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
5884
@code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
5885
@var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
5886
the same name, same entity size and same flags.  @var{entsize} must be an
5887
absolute expression.  For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
5888
which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate.  Thus
5889
@code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"};  A reference to the first
5890
@code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
5891
 
5892
If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
5893
be present along with an additional field like this:
5894
 
5895
@smallexample
5896
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
5897
@end smallexample
5898
 
5899
The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
5900
particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can contain:
5901
@table @code
5902
@item comdat
5903
indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
5904
@item .gnu.linkonce
5905
an alias for comdat
5906
@end table
5907
 
5908
Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
5909
the Merge flag should come first, like this:
5910
 
5911
@smallexample
5912
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
5913
@end smallexample
5914
 
5915
If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
5916
@code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
5917
present.  Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
5918
this directive.  If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
5919
@code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
5920
If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
5921
 
5922
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
5923
the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
5924
none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
5925
executable.  The section will contain data.
5926
 
5927
For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
5928
directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
5929
 
5930
@smallexample
5931
.section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
5932
@end smallexample
5933
 
5934
Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of comma
5935
separated flags:
5936
@table @code
5937
@item #alloc
5938
section is allocatable
5939
@item #write
5940
section is writable
5941
@item #execinstr
5942
section is executable
5943
@item #exclude
5944
section is excluded from executable and shared library.
5945
@item #tls
5946
section is used for thread local storage
5947
@end table
5948
 
5949
This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
5950
contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
5951
some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
5952
work.
5953
@end ifset
5954
@end ifset
5955
 
5956
@node Set
5957
@section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5958
 
5959
@cindex @code{set} directive
5960
@cindex symbol value, setting
5961
Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.  This
5962
changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
5963
@var{expression}.  If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
5964
flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
5965
 
5966
You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
5967
 
5968
If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
5969
file is the last value stored into it.
5970
 
5971
@ifset Z80
5972
On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
5973
@samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
5974
@end ifset
5975
 
5976
@node Short
5977
@section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
5978
 
5979
@cindex @code{short} directive
5980
@ifset GENERIC
5981
@code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
5982
@xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
5983
 
5984
In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
5985
numbers of different lengths.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5986
@end ifset
5987
@ifclear GENERIC
5988
@ifset W16
5989
@code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
5990
@end ifset
5991
@ifset W32
5992
This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5993
a 16 bit number for each.
5994
@end ifset
5995
@end ifclear
5996
 
5997
@node Single
5998
@section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
5999
 
6000
@cindex @code{single} directive
6001
@cindex floating point numbers (single)
6002
This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
6003
has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6004
@ifset GENERIC
6005
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6006
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6007
@end ifset
6008
@ifclear GENERIC
6009
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
6010
On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6011
numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6012
@end ifset
6013
@end ifclear
6014
 
6015
@ifset COFF-ELF
6016
@node Size
6017
@section @code{.size}
6018
 
6019
This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6020
 
6021
@ifset COFF
6022
@ifset ELF
6023
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6024
@subheading COFF Version
6025
@end ifset
6026
 
6027
@cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6028
For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6029
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6030
 
6031
@smallexample
6032
.size @var{expression}
6033
@end smallexample
6034
 
6035
@ifset BOUT
6036
@samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6037
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6038
ignores it.
6039
@end ifset
6040
@end ifset
6041
 
6042
@ifset ELF
6043
@ifset COFF
6044
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6045
@subheading ELF Version
6046
@end ifset
6047
 
6048
@cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6049
For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6050
 
6051
@smallexample
6052
.size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6053
@end smallexample
6054
 
6055
This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6056
The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6057
arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6058
symbols.
6059
@end ifset
6060
@end ifset
6061
 
6062
@ifclear no-space-dir
6063
@node Skip
6064
@section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6065
 
6066
@cindex @code{skip} directive
6067
@cindex filling memory
6068
This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6069
@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma and
6070
@var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same as
6071
@samp{.space}.
6072
@end ifclear
6073
 
6074
@node Sleb128
6075
@section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6076
 
6077
@cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6078
@var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.''  This is a
6079
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6080
symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6081
 
6082
@ifclear no-space-dir
6083
@node Space
6084
@section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6085
 
6086
@cindex @code{space} directive
6087
@cindex filling memory
6088
This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6089
@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma
6090
and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same
6091
as @samp{.skip}.
6092
 
6093
@ifset HPPA
6094
@quotation
6095
@emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6096
targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute.  See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6097
Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6098
@code{.space} directive.  @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6099
for a summary.
6100
@end quotation
6101
@end ifset
6102
@end ifclear
6103
 
6104
@ifset have-stabs
6105
@node Stab
6106
@section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6107
 
6108
@cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6109
@cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6110
There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6111
All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6112
The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6113
cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6114
Up to five fields are required:
6115
 
6116
@table @var
6117
@item string
6118
This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
6119
@samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
6120
debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6121
using this field.
6122
 
6123
@item type
6124
An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6125
this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6126
and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6127
 
6128
@item other
6129
An absolute expression.  The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6130
low 8 bits of this expression.
6131
 
6132
@item desc
6133
An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6134
bits of this expression.
6135
 
6136
@item value
6137
An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6138
@end table
6139
 
6140
If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6141
or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6142
you get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is
6143
compatible with earlier assemblers!
6144
 
6145
@table @code
6146
@cindex @code{stabd} directive
6147
@item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6148
 
6149
The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6150
It is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a
6151
null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6152
strings.
6153
 
6154
The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6155
relocatably.  When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6156
is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6157
assembled.
6158
 
6159
@cindex @code{stabn} directive
6160
@item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6161
The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6162
 
6163
@cindex @code{stabs} directive
6164
@item .stabs @var{string} ,  @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6165
All five fields are specified.
6166
@end table
6167
@end ifset
6168
@c end     have-stabs
6169
 
6170
@node String
6171
@section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6172
"@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6173
 
6174
@cindex string, copying to object file
6175
@cindex string8, copying to object file
6176
@cindex string16, copying to object file
6177
@cindex string32, copying to object file
6178
@cindex string64, copying to object file
6179
@cindex @code{string} directive
6180
@cindex @code{string8} directive
6181
@cindex @code{string16} directive
6182
@cindex @code{string32} directive
6183
@cindex @code{string64} directive
6184
 
6185
Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file.  You may specify more than
6186
one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise specified for a
6187
particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6188
You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6189
 
6190
The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6191
the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6192
copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively.  The expanded characters
6193
are stored in target endianness byte order.
6194
 
6195
Example:
6196
@smallexample
6197
        .string32 "BYE"
6198
expands to:
6199
        .string   "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0"  /* On little endian targets.  */
6200
        .string   "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E"  /* On big endian targets.  */
6201
@end smallexample
6202
 
6203
 
6204
@node Struct
6205
@section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6206
 
6207
@cindex @code{struct} directive
6208
Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6209
which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as follows:
6210
@smallexample
6211
        .struct 0
6212
field1:
6213
        .struct field1 + 4
6214
field2:
6215
        .struct field2 + 4
6216
field3:
6217
@end smallexample
6218
This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6219
@code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6220
value 8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6221
use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6222
before further assembly.
6223
 
6224
@ifset ELF
6225
@node SubSection
6226
@section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6227
 
6228
@cindex @code{subsection} directive
6229
@cindex Section Stack
6230
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6231
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6232
@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6233
(@pxref{Previous}).
6234
 
6235
This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}.  The current
6236
section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6237
in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6238
@end ifset
6239
 
6240
@ifset ELF
6241
@node Symver
6242
@section @code{.symver}
6243
@cindex @code{symver} directive
6244
@cindex symbol versioning
6245
@cindex versions of symbols
6246
Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6247
within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6248
typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6249
There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6250
into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6251
shared library.
6252
 
6253
For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6254
@smallexample
6255
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6256
@end smallexample
6257
If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6258
being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6259
alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6260
just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6261
permitted in symbol names.  The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6262
of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced.  The name @var{name}
6263
itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6264
have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6265
file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6266
function is being mentioned.  The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6267
the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6268
building a shared library.  If you are attempting to override a versioned
6269
symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6270
nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6271
 
6272
If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6273
references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}.  If no
6274
reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6275
symbol table.
6276
 
6277
Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6278
@smallexample
6279
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6280
@end smallexample
6281
In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6282
the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6283
difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6284
references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6285
 
6286
The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6287
@smallexample
6288
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6289
@end smallexample
6290
When @var{name} is not defined within the
6291
file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6292
@var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6293
name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6294
@end ifset
6295
 
6296
@ifset COFF
6297
@node Tag
6298
@section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6299
 
6300
@cindex COFF structure debugging
6301
@cindex structure debugging, COFF
6302
@cindex @code{tag} directive
6303
This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6304
information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
6305
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  Tags are used to link structure
6306
definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6307
@ifset BOUT
6308
 
6309
@samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6310
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6311
ignores it.
6312
@end ifset
6313
@end ifset
6314
 
6315
@node Text
6316
@section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6317
 
6318
@cindex @code{text} directive
6319
Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6320
the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6321
expression.  If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6322
is used.
6323
 
6324
@node Title
6325
@section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6326
 
6327
@cindex @code{title} directive
6328
@cindex listing control: title line
6329
Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6330
source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6331
 
6332
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6333
it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6334
 
6335
@ifset COFF-ELF
6336
@node Type
6337
@section @code{.type}
6338
 
6339
This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6340
 
6341
@ifset COFF
6342
@ifset ELF
6343
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6344
@subheading COFF Version
6345
@end ifset
6346
 
6347
@cindex COFF symbol type
6348
@cindex symbol type, COFF
6349
@cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6350
For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6351
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6352
 
6353
@smallexample
6354
.type @var{int}
6355
@end smallexample
6356
 
6357
This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6358
entry.
6359
 
6360
@ifset BOUT
6361
@samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6362
@command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6363
directive but ignores it.
6364
@end ifset
6365
@end ifset
6366
 
6367
@ifset ELF
6368
@ifset COFF
6369
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6370
@subheading ELF Version
6371
@end ifset
6372
 
6373
@cindex ELF symbol type
6374
@cindex symbol type, ELF
6375
@cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6376
For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6377
 
6378
@smallexample
6379
.type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6380
@end smallexample
6381
 
6382
This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6383
function symbol or an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes
6384
supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6385
compatibility with various other assemblers.
6386
 
6387
Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6388
@samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6389
below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will be accepted by
6390
the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6391
maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6392
assemblers.
6393
 
6394
The syntaxes supported are:
6395
 
6396
@smallexample
6397
  .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6398
  .type <name>,#<type>
6399
  .type <name>,@@<type>
6400
  .type <name>,%<type>
6401
  .type <name>,"<type>"
6402
@end smallexample
6403
 
6404
The types supported are:
6405
 
6406
@table @gcctabopt
6407
@item STT_FUNC
6408
@itemx function
6409
Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6410
 
6411
@item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6412
@itemx gnu_indirect_function
6413
Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6414
processing.  (This is only supported on Linux targeted assemblers).
6415
 
6416
@item STT_OBJECT
6417
@itemx object
6418
Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6419
 
6420
@item STT_TLS
6421
@itemx tls_object
6422
Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6423
 
6424
@item STT_COMMON
6425
@itemx common
6426
Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6427
 
6428
@item STT_NOTYPE
6429
@itemx notype
6430
Does not mark the symbol in any way.  It is supported just for completeness.
6431
 
6432
@item gnu_unique_object
6433
Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object.  The dynamic linker
6434
will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6435
name and type in use.  (This is only supported on Linux targeted assemblers).
6436
 
6437
@end table
6438
 
6439
Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6440
 
6441
@end ifset
6442
@end ifset
6443
 
6444
@node Uleb128
6445
@section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6446
 
6447
@cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6448
@var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.''  This is a
6449
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6450
symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6451
 
6452
@ifset COFF
6453
@node Val
6454
@section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6455
 
6456
@cindex @code{val} directive
6457
@cindex COFF value attribute
6458
@cindex value attribute, COFF
6459
This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6460
records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6461
entry.
6462
@ifset BOUT
6463
 
6464
@samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6465
configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6466
@end ifset
6467
@end ifset
6468
 
6469
@ifset ELF
6470
@node Version
6471
@section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6472
 
6473
@cindex @code{version} directive
6474
This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6475
formatted note of type NT_VERSION.  The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6476
@end ifset
6477
 
6478
@ifset ELF
6479
@node VTableEntry
6480
@section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6481
 
6482
@cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6483
This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6484
@code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6485
 
6486
@node VTableInherit
6487
@section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6488
 
6489
@cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6490
This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6491
@code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6492
parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
6493
parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6494
@end ifset
6495
 
6496
@node Warning
6497
@section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6498
@cindex warning directive
6499
Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6500
(@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6501
 
6502
@node Weak
6503
@section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6504
 
6505
@cindex @code{weak} directive
6506
This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6507
@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6508
 
6509
On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.  This
6510
directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6511
@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6512
 
6513
On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6514
When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6515
alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6516
 
6517
@node Weakref
6518
@section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6519
 
6520
@cindex @code{weakref} directive
6521
This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6522
be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6523
If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6524
will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6525
symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6526
 
6527
The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6528
assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6529
symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6530
resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6531
had the references to the alias removed.
6532
 
6533
The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6534
within the assembler.
6535
 
6536
@node Word
6537
@section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6538
 
6539
@cindex @code{word} directive
6540
This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6541
separated by commas.
6542
@ifclear GENERIC
6543
@ifset W32
6544
For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6545
@end ifset
6546
@ifset W16
6547
For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6548
@end ifset
6549
@end ifclear
6550
@ifset GENERIC
6551
 
6552
The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6553
depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6554
@end ifset
6555
 
6556
@c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6557
@c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6558
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6559
@cindex difference tables altered
6560
@cindex altered difference tables
6561
@quotation
6562
@emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6563
@end quotation
6564
 
6565
@ifset GENERIC
6566
Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6567
addressing, require the following special treatment.  If the machine of
6568
interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6569
@pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6570
 
6571
@end ifset
6572
In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6573
@command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6574
Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6575
compilers as part of jump tables.  Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6576
directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6577
@code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6578
creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6579
This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6580
first byte after the secondary table.  This short-jump prevents the flow
6581
of control from accidentally falling into the new table.  Inside the
6582
table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}.  The original @samp{.word}
6583
contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6584
@code{sym2}.
6585
 
6586
If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6587
secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted.  If there was a
6588
@samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6589
long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6590
and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6591
minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6592
entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6593
 
6594
@ifset INTERNALS
6595
@emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6596
@samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6597
assembly language programmers.
6598
@end ifset
6599
@end ifset
6600
@c end     DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6601
 
6602
@node Deprecated
6603
@section Deprecated Directives
6604
 
6605
@cindex deprecated directives
6606
@cindex obsolescent directives
6607
One day these directives won't work.
6608
They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6609
@table @t
6610
@item .abort
6611
@item .line
6612
@end table
6613
 
6614
@ifset ELF
6615
@node Object Attributes
6616
@chapter Object Attributes
6617
@cindex object attributes
6618
 
6619
@command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6620
into object files for that architecture.  But not all object files are alike.
6621
Many architectures support incompatible variations.  For instance, floating
6622
point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6623
requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6624
passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6625
hardware floating point unit.  Or, if two objects are built for different
6626
generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6627
newer generation at run-time.
6628
 
6629
This information is useful during and after linking.  At link time,
6630
@command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files.  After link
6631
time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6632
correctly.
6633
 
6634
Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes.  Each
6635
attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}.  The vendor is a
6636
string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag.  The tag is an integer,
6637
and indicates what property the attribute describes.  The value may be a string
6638
or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object.  Missing
6639
attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6640
 
6641
Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6642
The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6643
 
6644
@menu
6645
* GNU Object Attributes::               @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6646
* Defining New Object Attributes::      Defining New Object Attributes
6647
@end menu
6648
 
6649
@node GNU Object Attributes
6650
@section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6651
 
6652
The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6653
with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6654
 
6655
Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6656
its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6657
an integer value if the tag number is even.  The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6658
2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6659
architecture-dependent ones.
6660
 
6661
@subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6662
 
6663
These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6664
 
6665
@table @r
6666
@item Tag_compatibility (32)
6667
The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name.  If
6668
the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains.  If it is 1,
6669
then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain.  If it is greater
6670
than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6671
arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6672
@end table
6673
 
6674
@subsection MIPS Attributes
6675
 
6676
@table @r
6677
@item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6678
The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6679
 
6680
@itemize @bullet
6681
@item
6682
 
6683
@item
6684
1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6685
FPU.
6686
@item
6687
2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6688
@item
6689
3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6690
@item
6691
4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6692
double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6693
purpose registers.
6694
@end itemize
6695
@end table
6696
 
6697
@subsection PowerPC Attributes
6698
 
6699
@table @r
6700
@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6701
The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6702
 
6703
@itemize @bullet
6704
@item
6705
 
6706
@item
6707
1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6708
@item
6709
2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6710
@item
6711
3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6712
@end itemize
6713
 
6714
@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6715
The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6716
 
6717
@itemize @bullet
6718
@item
6719
 
6720
@item
6721
1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6722
@item
6723
2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6724
@item
6725
3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6726
@end itemize
6727
@end table
6728
 
6729
@node Defining New Object Attributes
6730
@section Defining New Object Attributes
6731
 
6732
If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6733
will need to modify.  New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6734
mailing list.
6735
 
6736
@itemize @bullet
6737
@item
6738
This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6739
@item
6740
The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6741
@item
6742
The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6743
and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6744
@item
6745
Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6746
@item
6747
@file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
6748
@item
6749
GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
6750
@end itemize
6751
 
6752
@end ifset
6753
 
6754
@ifset GENERIC
6755
@node Machine Dependencies
6756
@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6757
 
6758
@cindex machine dependencies
6759
The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
6760
each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs.  Floating point representations
6761
vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
6762
directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
6763
assemblers on a particular platform.  Finally, some versions of
6764
@command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
6765
optimization.
6766
 
6767
This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
6768
include details on any machine's instruction set.  For details on that
6769
subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
6770
 
6771
@menu
6772
@ifset ALPHA
6773
* Alpha-Dependent::             Alpha Dependent Features
6774
@end ifset
6775
@ifset ARC
6776
* ARC-Dependent::               ARC Dependent Features
6777
@end ifset
6778
@ifset ARM
6779
* ARM-Dependent::               ARM Dependent Features
6780
@end ifset
6781
@ifset AVR
6782
* AVR-Dependent::               AVR Dependent Features
6783
@end ifset
6784
@ifset Blackfin
6785
* Blackfin-Dependent::          Blackfin Dependent Features
6786
@end ifset
6787
@ifset CR16
6788
* CR16-Dependent::              CR16 Dependent Features
6789
@end ifset
6790
@ifset CRIS
6791
* CRIS-Dependent::              CRIS Dependent Features
6792
@end ifset
6793
@ifset D10V
6794
* D10V-Dependent::              D10V Dependent Features
6795
@end ifset
6796
@ifset D30V
6797
* D30V-Dependent::              D30V Dependent Features
6798
@end ifset
6799
@ifset H8/300
6800
* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6801
@end ifset
6802
@ifset HPPA
6803
* HPPA-Dependent::              HPPA Dependent Features
6804
@end ifset
6805
@ifset I370
6806
* ESA/390-Dependent::           IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
6807
@end ifset
6808
@ifset I80386
6809
* i386-Dependent::              Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
6810
@end ifset
6811
@ifset I860
6812
* i860-Dependent::              Intel 80860 Dependent Features
6813
@end ifset
6814
@ifset I960
6815
* i960-Dependent::              Intel 80960 Dependent Features
6816
@end ifset
6817
@ifset IA64
6818
* IA-64-Dependent::             Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
6819
@end ifset
6820
@ifset IP2K
6821
* IP2K-Dependent::              IP2K Dependent Features
6822
@end ifset
6823
@ifset LM32
6824
* LM32-Dependent::              LM32 Dependent Features
6825
@end ifset
6826
@ifset M32C
6827
* M32C-Dependent::              M32C Dependent Features
6828
@end ifset
6829
@ifset M32R
6830
* M32R-Dependent::              M32R Dependent Features
6831
@end ifset
6832
@ifset M680X0
6833
* M68K-Dependent::              M680x0 Dependent Features
6834
@end ifset
6835
@ifset M68HC11
6836
* M68HC11-Dependent::           M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
6837
@end ifset
6838
@ifset MICROBLAZE
6839
* MicroBlaze-Dependent::        MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
6840
@end ifset
6841
@ifset MIPS
6842
* MIPS-Dependent::              MIPS Dependent Features
6843
@end ifset
6844
@ifset MMIX
6845
* MMIX-Dependent::              MMIX Dependent Features
6846
@end ifset
6847
@ifset MSP430
6848
* MSP430-Dependent::            MSP430 Dependent Features
6849
@end ifset
6850
@ifset NS32K
6851
* NS32K-Dependent::             NS32K Dependent Features
6852
@end ifset
6853
@ifset SH
6854
* SH-Dependent::                Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
6855
* SH64-Dependent::              SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
6856
@end ifset
6857
@ifset PDP11
6858
* PDP-11-Dependent::            PDP-11 Dependent Features
6859
@end ifset
6860
@ifset PJ
6861
* PJ-Dependent::                picoJava Dependent Features
6862
@end ifset
6863
@ifset PPC
6864
* PPC-Dependent::               PowerPC Dependent Features
6865
@end ifset
6866
@ifset RX
6867
* RX-Dependent::                RX Dependent Features
6868
@end ifset
6869
@ifset S390
6870
* S/390-Dependent::             IBM S/390 Dependent Features
6871
@end ifset
6872
@ifset SCORE
6873
* SCORE-Dependent::             SCORE Dependent Features
6874
@end ifset
6875
@ifset SPARC
6876
* Sparc-Dependent::             SPARC Dependent Features
6877
@end ifset
6878
@ifset TIC54X
6879
* TIC54X-Dependent::            TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
6880
@end ifset
6881
@ifset TIC6X
6882
* TIC6X-Dependent ::            TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
6883
@end ifset
6884
@ifset V850
6885
* V850-Dependent::              V850 Dependent Features
6886
@end ifset
6887
@ifset XTENSA
6888
* Xtensa-Dependent::            Xtensa Dependent Features
6889
@end ifset
6890
@ifset Z80
6891
* Z80-Dependent::               Z80 Dependent Features
6892
@end ifset
6893
@ifset Z8000
6894
* Z8000-Dependent::             Z8000 Dependent Features
6895
@end ifset
6896
@ifset VAX
6897
* Vax-Dependent::               VAX Dependent Features
6898
@end ifset
6899
@end menu
6900
 
6901
@lowersections
6902
@end ifset
6903
 
6904
@c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
6905
@c in single-cpu versions.  This is mainly achieved by @lowersections.  There is a
6906
@c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
6907
@c "Machine Dependencies".  Hence the conditional nodenames in each
6908
@c major node below.  Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
6909
@c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
6910
@c in both conditional blocks.
6911
 
6912
@ifset ALPHA
6913
@include c-alpha.texi
6914
@end ifset
6915
 
6916
@ifset ARC
6917
@include c-arc.texi
6918
@end ifset
6919
 
6920
@ifset ARM
6921
@include c-arm.texi
6922
@end ifset
6923
 
6924
@ifset AVR
6925
@include c-avr.texi
6926
@end ifset
6927
 
6928
@ifset Blackfin
6929
@include c-bfin.texi
6930
@end ifset
6931
 
6932
@ifset CR16
6933
@include c-cr16.texi
6934
@end ifset
6935
 
6936
@ifset CRIS
6937
@include c-cris.texi
6938
@end ifset
6939
 
6940
@ifset Renesas-all
6941
@ifclear GENERIC
6942
@node Machine Dependencies
6943
@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6944
 
6945
The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
6946
and there are also some syntax differences among the families.  This
6947
chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
6948
family.
6949
 
6950
@menu
6951
* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6952
* SH-Dependent::                Renesas SH Dependent Features
6953
@end menu
6954
@lowersections
6955
@end ifclear
6956
@end ifset
6957
 
6958
@ifset D10V
6959
@include c-d10v.texi
6960
@end ifset
6961
 
6962
@ifset D30V
6963
@include c-d30v.texi
6964
@end ifset
6965
 
6966
@ifset H8/300
6967
@include c-h8300.texi
6968
@end ifset
6969
 
6970
@ifset HPPA
6971
@include c-hppa.texi
6972
@end ifset
6973
 
6974
@ifset I370
6975
@include c-i370.texi
6976
@end ifset
6977
 
6978
@ifset I80386
6979
@include c-i386.texi
6980
@end ifset
6981
 
6982
@ifset I860
6983
@include c-i860.texi
6984
@end ifset
6985
 
6986
@ifset I960
6987
@include c-i960.texi
6988
@end ifset
6989
 
6990
@ifset IA64
6991
@include c-ia64.texi
6992
@end ifset
6993
 
6994
@ifset IP2K
6995
@include c-ip2k.texi
6996
@end ifset
6997
 
6998
@ifset LM32
6999
@include c-lm32.texi
7000
@end ifset
7001
 
7002
@ifset M32C
7003
@include c-m32c.texi
7004
@end ifset
7005
 
7006
@ifset M32R
7007
@include c-m32r.texi
7008
@end ifset
7009
 
7010
@ifset M680X0
7011
@include c-m68k.texi
7012
@end ifset
7013
 
7014
@ifset M68HC11
7015
@include c-m68hc11.texi
7016
@end ifset
7017
 
7018
@ifset MICROBLAZE
7019
@include c-microblaze.texi
7020
@end ifset
7021
 
7022
@ifset MIPS
7023
@include c-mips.texi
7024
@end ifset
7025
 
7026
@ifset MMIX
7027
@include c-mmix.texi
7028
@end ifset
7029
 
7030
@ifset MSP430
7031
@include c-msp430.texi
7032
@end ifset
7033
 
7034
@ifset NS32K
7035
@include c-ns32k.texi
7036
@end ifset
7037
 
7038
@ifset PDP11
7039
@include c-pdp11.texi
7040
@end ifset
7041
 
7042
@ifset PJ
7043
@include c-pj.texi
7044
@end ifset
7045
 
7046
@ifset PPC
7047
@include c-ppc.texi
7048
@end ifset
7049
 
7050
@ifset RX
7051
@include c-rx.texi
7052
@end ifset
7053
 
7054
@ifset S390
7055
@include c-s390.texi
7056
@end ifset
7057
 
7058
@ifset SCORE
7059
@include c-score.texi
7060
@end ifset
7061
 
7062
@ifset SH
7063
@include c-sh.texi
7064
@include c-sh64.texi
7065
@end ifset
7066
 
7067
@ifset SPARC
7068
@include c-sparc.texi
7069
@end ifset
7070
 
7071
@ifset TIC54X
7072
@include c-tic54x.texi
7073
@end ifset
7074
 
7075
@ifset TIC6X
7076
@include c-tic6x.texi
7077
@end ifset
7078
 
7079
@ifset Z80
7080
@include c-z80.texi
7081
@end ifset
7082
 
7083
@ifset Z8000
7084
@include c-z8k.texi
7085
@end ifset
7086
 
7087
@ifset VAX
7088
@include c-vax.texi
7089
@end ifset
7090
 
7091
@ifset V850
7092
@include c-v850.texi
7093
@end ifset
7094
 
7095
@ifset XTENSA
7096
@include c-xtensa.texi
7097
@end ifset
7098
 
7099
@ifset GENERIC
7100
@c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7101
@raisesections
7102
@end ifset
7103
 
7104
@node Reporting Bugs
7105
@chapter Reporting Bugs
7106
@cindex bugs in assembler
7107
@cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7108
 
7109
Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7110
 
7111
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7112
not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7113
entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7114
Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7115
 
7116
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7117
information that enables us to fix the bug.
7118
 
7119
@menu
7120
* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
7121
* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
7122
@end menu
7123
 
7124
@node Bug Criteria
7125
@section Have You Found a Bug?
7126
@cindex bug criteria
7127
 
7128
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7129
 
7130
@itemize @bullet
7131
@cindex fatal signal
7132
@cindex assembler crash
7133
@cindex crash of assembler
7134
@item
7135
If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7136
@command{@value{AS}} bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
7137
 
7138
@cindex error on valid input
7139
@item
7140
If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7141
 
7142
@cindex invalid input
7143
@item
7144
If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7145
is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7146
be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7147
 
7148
@item
7149
If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7150
of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7151
@end itemize
7152
 
7153
@node Bug Reporting
7154
@section How to Report Bugs
7155
@cindex bug reports
7156
@cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7157
 
7158
A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.  If
7159
you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7160
contact that organization first.
7161
 
7162
You can find contact information for many support companies and
7163
individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7164
distribution.
7165
 
7166
@ifset BUGURL
7167
In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7168
to @value{BUGURL}.
7169
@end ifset
7170
 
7171
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7172
@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
7173
fact or leave it out, state it!
7174
 
7175
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7176
and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might assume that the
7177
name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.  Well, probably it does
7178
not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7179
happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7180
perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7181
the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and
7182
give a specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7183
and the most helpful.
7184
 
7185
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7186
it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7187
that the bug has not been reported previously.
7188
 
7189
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7190
bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
7191
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7192
You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7193
 
7194
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7195
 
7196
@itemize @bullet
7197
@item
7198
The version of @command{@value{AS}}.  @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7199
it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7200
 
7201
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7202
the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7203
 
7204
@item
7205
Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7206
 
7207
@item
7208
The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7209
version number.
7210
 
7211
@item
7212
What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7213
``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7214
 
7215
@item
7216
The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7217
observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7218
all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7219
 
7220
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7221
and then we might not encounter the bug.
7222
 
7223
@item
7224
A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is observed when
7225
the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7226
high level language source.  Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7227
when run with the @samp{-S} option.  If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7228
the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7229
file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7230
@command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7231
 
7232
@item
7233
A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7234
incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7235
 
7236
Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7237
will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7238
notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us a chance to
7239
make a mistake.
7240
 
7241
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7242
explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7243
@command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7244
library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours
7245
would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7246
would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
7247
expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7248
observations.
7249
 
7250
@item
7251
If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7252
diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7253
option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
7254
discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7255
by line number.
7256
 
7257
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7258
sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7259
@end itemize
7260
 
7261
Here are some things that are not necessary:
7262
 
7263
@itemize @bullet
7264
@item
7265
A description of the envelope of the bug.
7266
 
7267
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7268
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7269
changes will not affect it.
7270
 
7271
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7272
will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7273
with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7274
We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7275
 
7276
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7277
of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
7278
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7279
less time, and so on.
7280
 
7281
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7282
report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7283
 
7284
@item
7285
A patch for the bug.
7286
 
7287
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
7288
the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7289
a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
7290
to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7291
 
7292
Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7293
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7294
the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7295
one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7296
 
7297
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7298
patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
7299
help us to understand.
7300
 
7301
@item
7302
A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7303
 
7304
Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
7305
things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7306
@end itemize
7307
 
7308
@node Acknowledgements
7309
@chapter Acknowledgements
7310
 
7311
If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7312
it is not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
7313
maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently
7314
@c (January 1994),
7315
the maintainer is Ken Raeburn (email address @code{raeburn@@cygnus.com}).
7316
 
7317
Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7318
more details?}
7319
 
7320
Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7321
information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7322
extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7323
 
7324
K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7325
many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7326
up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7327
testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7328
including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7329
and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7330
support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7331
port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7332
file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7333
assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7334
 
7335
Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7336
in format-specific I/O modules.
7337
 
7338
The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric Youngdale
7339
has done much work with it since.
7340
 
7341
The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7342
 
7343
Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7344
 
7345
The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7346
University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7347
 
7348
Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7349
(@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7350
(which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7351
support a.out format.
7352
 
7353
Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7354
tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7355
Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7356
use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7357
targets.
7358
 
7359
John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7360
simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives.  He
7361
updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7362
fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7363
remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}).  John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7364
cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7365
required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7366
 
7367
Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7368
68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7369
added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7370
PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7371
 
7372
Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7373
 
7374
Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7375
 
7376
Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7377
along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7378
formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7379
the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7380
 
7381
Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7382
Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7383
Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7384
Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7385
and some initial 64-bit support).
7386
 
7387
Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7388
 
7389
Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7390
support for openVMS/Alpha.
7391
 
7392
Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7393
flavors.
7394
 
7395
David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7396
Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7397
 
7398
Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7399
configuration enhancements.
7400
 
7401
Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7402
 
7403
Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements.  If
7404
you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7405
want to be, let us know.  Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7406
intentionally leaving anyone out.
7407
 
7408
@node GNU Free Documentation License
7409
@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7410
@include fdl.texi
7411
 
7412
@node AS Index
7413
@unnumbered AS Index
7414
 
7415
@printindex cp
7416
 
7417
@bye
7418
@c Local Variables:
7419
@c fill-column: 79
7420
@c End:

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.